HyperMesh 4.0tutorials

Altair
Engineering
Altair HyperMesh Tutorials

Version 4.0
Contact Altair Engineering at:
Web site www.altair.com
FTP site Address: ftp.altair.com or ftp2.altair.com
Login: ftp
Password: <your e-mail address>
Location Telephone e-mail
North America 248.614.2400 hwsupport@altair.com
Germany +49 (0)7031.6208.22 support@altair.de
India +91.80.852.0327 support@altair-eng.soft.net
Italy +39.011.9007.711 support@altairtorino.it

+39.800.905595
Japan +81.3.5396.1341 aj-support@altairjp.co.jp
Scandinavia +46 (0)46.286.2050 support@altair.se
United Kingdom +44 (0)1327.810.700 supportuk@uk.altair.com
© 2000 Altair Engineering, Inc. All rights reserved.
Trademark Acknowledgments:
Altair HyperWorks, Altair MotionView, Altair HyperMesh, Altair HyperGraph, Altair HyperOpt, Altair
HyperShape/Pro, Altair OptiStruct, and Altair HyperForm are registered trademarks of Altair Engineering,
Inc.
All other trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
The Location of the HyperMesh Tutorial Files
All files referenced in the HyperMesh tutorials are located in the HyperWorks installation directory
under /tutorials/hm/.
If you do not know the location of the HyperWorks installation directory, contact your systems
administrator.
The following tutorials are included:

• Structuring the HyperMesh Database - HM-100
• Introduction to HyperMesh - HM-110
• User Interface Changes - HM-112
• Creating a Macro Menu - HM-115
• Geometry Creating and Editing - HM-120
• Geometry Clean Up - HM-130
• Defeature Panel - HM-131
• Automeshing Module- HM-135L
• Automesh/Remesh - HM-136
• Automesh/Proj to Edge-HM-137
• Automeshing Tria Transition Features - HM-140
• Chordal Deviation Meshing - HM-141
• Connecting Components - HM-200
• Building 1-D Elements - HM-210
• Spotweld - Hm-215
• Calculating Beam Cross Section - HM-220
• Building Surfaces and Shell Meshes - HM-300L
• Building Solid Elements - HM-400
• Using the Automatic Tetramesher - HM-450
• Element Editing: Splitting and Combining Shell Elements - HM-500L
• Editing Elements by Moving Nodes - 510L
• Model Checking - HM-520
• Using OptiStruct in HyperMesh - HM-550
• Deformed and Contour Plotting - HM-610
• HyperMesh 4.0 Post-processing Features - HM-620
• Fatigue Panel - HM-630-L
• Building and Annotating Plots - HM-700
• Performing Curve Math - HM-710
• NASTRAN Static Analysis Using HyperMesh - HM-1010-L
• Modeling Contact for ABAQUS - HM-1020-L
• Stress Analysis using ANSYS - HM-1030
• Modeling Contact for MARC - HM-1050
• Modeling a 3-D Example for MARC - HM-1051
Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials 3

• General Interfacing with Crash Analysis Solvers - HM-1100
• Dummy Positioning, Seatbelt Routing, and Control Volumes_HM-1101
• LS-DYNA3D Interface - HM-1110-L
• PAM-CRASH Interface - HM-1120-L
• RADIOSS Interface - HM-1130-L
• DYTRAN Interface - HM-1140-L
• Composite Panel - HM-1300
4 HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering

Structuring the HyperMesh Database - HM-100
In this tutorial, you use the collectors panel to create, update, and assign dictionaries to collectors.
You also update existing cards by using the card panel. You start with a HyperMesh database file
that does not have any dictionaries assigned.
administrator.
See Also
Creating and Editing Dictionaries and Editing Cards
Creating and Editing Dictionaries and Editing Cards
To retrieve the database file:
1. Select the files panel.

2. Select the hm file subpanel.
3. Double-click file = and select HM100-plate.hm30.
4. Click retrieve.
To specify solver:
1. Select the template subpanel.

2. Double-click template file = and select nastran/general.
3. Click return.
To update the element types to the NASTRAN format:
1. Select the 1D page.

2. Select the elem types panel.
3. Click quad4= and select CQUAD4 as the quad element type.
4. Click tria = and select CTRIA3 as the tria element type.
5. Click elems to access the extended entity selection menu.
6. Select all.
7. Click update.
8. Click return to exit the elem types panel.

To update the load types:
1. Select the BCs page.

2. Select the load types panel.
3. Click force = and select FORCE.
4. Click constraint = and select SPC.
5. Click loads to access the extended entity selection menu.
6. Select all.
7. Click update.
8. Click return to exit the load types panel.
To create a material collector:
1. Select the collectors panel.

2. Select the create subpanel.
3. Click the switch after collector type and select mats.
4. Click name = and enter Plate_mat.
5. Click the switch under creation method and select card image.
6. Click card image = and select MAT1.
7. Click create/edit.
A pop-up card is displayed.
8. Click E, click the data entry field, and enter 2e+5.
9. Click NU, click the data entry field, and enter .3.
10. Click return to accept the values.
To create an element collector:
1. Click the switch after collector type and select comps.

2. Click name = and enter Plate.
4. Click card image = and select PSHELL.
5. Click material = and select Plate_mat.
6. Click color and select color 8.
8. Click T, click the data entry field, and enter .25.
9. Click return.

To update a load collector:
1. Select the update subpanel.

2. Click the switch after collector type and select loadcols.
3. Click the highlighted loadcols.
4. Activate the AUTO1 checkbox.
5. Click return.
7. Click update.
8. Activate the color checkbox.
9. Click update.
10. Click return to exit the collectors panel.
To change the name of existing collectors:
1. Select the rename panel.

2. Select the individually subpanel.
3. Click the switch and select loadcols.
4. Click collector = and select AUTO1.
5. Click newname = and enter load1.
6. Click rename.
7. Click return to exit the rename panel.
To move existing elements into a different collector:
1. Select the organize panel.

2. Click the input collector switch and select elems.
3. Click elems and select all.
4. Click destination = and select Plate.
5. Click move.
6. Click return to exit the organize panel.

To view and edit a collector card:
1. Click card in the permanent menu.

2. Click the input collector switch and select comps.
3. Click comps.
4. To select the component, pick one of the elements in the model.
The element temporarily turns white.
5. Click edit.
The card appears and the thickness may be edited.
6. Click return to accept any changes and exit the card.

Introduction to HyperMesh - HM-110
This tutorial introduces HyperMesh to new users. The following sections are included:
• The HyperMesh Environment
• Using HyperMesh
Each section contains links to lessons in the HyperMesh User’s Guide On-line Help. These lessons
explain the HyperMesh interface, terminology, and how to use the HyperMesh panels.
All files referenced in this tutorial are located in the HyperWorks installation directory under
/demos/hm.
administrator.
The HyperMesh Environment

This section explains the HyperMesh environment. The HyperMesh window has four main menu
areas: graphics, the header bar, the main menu, and the permanent menu. The header bar divides
the screen into two areas. The graphics area of the screen is above the bar and the menu area is
below the bar. The menu area is further divided into the main menu and the permanent menu. A
secondary menu can be accessed by using keyboard keys. The secondary menu allows you to use
panels that add information necessary to complete the currently active menu panel. The topics below
are linked to lessons in the HyperMesh User’s Guide On-line Help.
• Starting HyperMesh.
• The HyperMesh Environment
• The Header Bar
• The Main Menu
• The Permanent Menu
• The Graphics Area
• The Secondary Menu
• The Mouse
• The Keyboard

Using HyperMesh
This section explains how to use a typical HyperMesh panel by description and example. The first
topic explains how to retrieve a HyperMesh database. Use this file to complete the remaining
tutorials. Follow the topics below in the order that they are listed to complete this section.
• Retrieving a HyperMesh Database

• Using Input Collectors
• Picking Entities on the Screen
• Extended Entity Selection
• Using Plane and Vector Collectors
• Viewing Models
• Using the Display Panel
• Graphics Modes
• Setting Global Parameters
• Saving a File
• Printing Screen Images
• Importing and Exporting Data

User Interface Changes - HM-112
This tutorial introduces the major changes to the HyperMesh 3.0 graphical user interface (GUI). It
includes a list of the panels by page and alphabetically.
Similar in structure to HyperMesh 2.1, HyperMesh 3.0 consists of three menu systems: the main,
secondary, and permanent menus. Tutorials on the following topics are included:
• The Main Menu
• The Permanent Menu
under /tutorials/hm.
administrator.
The Main Menu

Due to the addition of functions and options, the main menu is expanded from five to seven pages.
The page names, Geom, 1-D, 2-D, 3-D, BCs, Tool, and Post, are given by the functionality of the
page panels. Some of the panels on each page contain functionality that applies to multiple pages.
These panels appear on all pages applicable to that panel’s functionality. Also, the more frequently
used panels appear on multiple pages, allowing you to complete a process without changing pages.
To display the common panels between all menu pages:
1. Click Geom through Post.

The common panels in all pages are files, collectors, assemblies, organize, color, rename,
and reorder.
2. Click Geom, 1-D, and BCs.
The common panels in these pages are vectors and systems.
3. Click 1-D, 2-D, 3-D.

The common panels, edit element, split, replace, detach, order change, config edit and elem
types, are located in the right most column of these pages.

New Panels
HyperMesh 3.0 includes ten new panels:
• geom cleanup (Geom)

• beam xsect, joints, line mesh (1-D)
• elem offset (2-D, 3-D)
• equations, solver, vectors (Geom, 1-D and BCs)
• penetration, convert (Tool)
A summary of the new pages and panels is as follows:
Page Name Description New Panels
Geom Geometry creation and editing functions geom cleanup
vectors
1-D 1-D elements creation and editing functions line mesh
beam xsect
joints
vectors
2-D 2-D elements creation and editing functions elem offset
3-D 3-D elements creation and editing functions elem offset
BCs Loads and boundary creation, output equations

requests
solver
vectors
Tool Utility, model checking, and editing functions convert and information
functions
penetration
Post Post-Processing functions
The stitch panel, as well as the line from surface edges and split surface edge options in the
surface edit panel, are no longer included in the menu. The new geom cleanup panel now covers
these functions. Please refer to Version 2.1 vs. 3.0 Panel Location for detailed information on the
differences between panels in HyperMesh 2.1 and 3.0.

files
Panels related to file management are grouped into an integrated files panel. This panel allows you
to save and retrieve HyperMesh binary databases, import CAD generated geometry or finite element
model information, export CAD geometry or finite element information for specific analysis codes,
specify a template file, specify a result file, and execute a HyperMesh command file. These
subpanels include the following enhancements:
hm files
• Space between the save and retrieve buttons in order to prevent accidental selection.
• A new option, save in compact.
By default, a file saved in a non-compact format includes surface facets and line/surface
drawing information. Choosing the save in compact format reduces the size of any saved hm
binary database by suppressing faceted surfaces created during the visual options-shaded
surface toggle under the geom cleanup and automesh panel. Non-compact databases save
these facets in the binary database, allowing an increase in speed during surface shading and
automeshing.
import
• A new option, offset ids.

An offset ids toggle is included which allows you to assign id values to imported bulk data deck
entities such as nodes, elems, comps, etc. This improves the assembly process of building full
models from many individual files.
• Supports direct CAD import.

For UG, CATIA, STL, HyperMesh versions before 3.0 did not support direct import of UG and
CATIA files. Consequently, all CAD data had to be in IGES format before import to HyperMesh.
In HyperMesh 3.0, you can import not only geometry data in IGES format but also geometry data
directly from these newly added CAD readers. In addition, HyperMesh 3.0 supports UG version
13. When running on a UNIX workstation, the UG reader does not consume a UG license. To
use the UG reader, rlogin to the machine that UG is installed on and run HyperMesh on this
machine in order to use the UG library. If you are using a machine on the same network where

UG is installed and your machine platform is the same as the machine that has UG installed on it,
setup the following environment variables in your cshrc file:
UGII_BASE_DIR=/home/apps/eds130
UGII_ROOT_DIR=/home/apps/eds130/bin/
On a PC, a UG license is required to run the UG feinput translator; the UG feinput translator in
HyperMesh requires an entire UG 13 environment.
• options for IGES import is renamed.

Since direct CAD import is available in this version, the name is changed to options for CAD
import. options for CAD import includes the geometry tolerance and cleanup tolerance. A
geometry tolerance can be set to use file geom tolerance, or geom tol =, a user-specified
value. The cleanup tolerance can be set to use automatic cleanup tol, don’t cleanup
topology, or cleanup tol =, a user-specified value.
export
• Retains the same function as the export data panel in versions before HyperMesh 3.0.
command
• Retains the same function as the command panel in versions before HyperMesh 3.0.
template
• Links with the field in the global panel.

To load a template, you can either choose the template in the file/template sub-panel or in the
global/template sub-panel.
results
• Links with the field in the global panel.

To load a result file, you can either type the file name in the file/results sub-panel or in the
result file field in the global panel.

The Permanent Menu
HyperMesh 3.0 includes the following new additions to the permanent menu: sliding zoom (s),
clockwise rotation , counter-clockwise rotation , back (b), and on-line Help (help). The
following functions are enhanced: window (w), dynamic rotation (r), and user options (options).
The permanent menu.
New Functions
s Slide zoom: zooms the model in and out by dragging the mouse in a vertical direction.
Counterclockwise rotation: rotates the model counterclockwise by the angle set in the
options panel.
Clockwise rotation: rotates the model clockwise by the angle set in the options panel.
b Back function: returns the model to the initial orientation after a rotation (r) or arc dynamic
motion (a).
help Context sensitive on-line Help: accesses the HyperMesh on-line Help.
To use the HyperMesh on-line Help:
1. Click help on the permanent menu.

The table of contents is displayed.
2. Double-click a Help topic.

The Help topic is displayed. How do I’s are listed in green.
3. Click a How do I.
A step by step example procedure appears.
Note: HyperMesh 3.0 on-line Help is context sensitive. When working within a panel, click help
to display the Help topic available for that panel. The main Help contents tab appears if
you are not within a panel.

w Enhancement in the window manager: two new functions are added to this panel:
display legend and display simulation title. These functions allow you to control
the contour plot’s legend and simulation title display. On by default, these functions
can be turned off in the post-processing panels.
r Enhancement in the rotation function: the rotation function now allows you to select a
node or point as a rotation center using the middle mouse button. If a middle mouse
button is not available, press the alt key and the left mouse button to pick the
center.
a Enhancement in the arc dynamic motion function: the arc dynamic motion function
now allows you to select a node or point as a rotation center using the middle mouse
button. If a middle mouse button is not available, press the alt key and the left
mouse button to pick the center.
options Integrates the modeling, graphics, fonts, colors, page name, postscript, and
spaceball subpanels.
The Modeling Subpanel

This panel contains most of the entities previously located in the options panel as well as new
options including the cleanup and geometry tolerance fields, fixed points, and coincident node
picking.

node tol Used when finding line intersections and determining duplicate nodes.
The node tolerance also affects the generation of elements in the
automesher. When quads are created and the side of a quad is less
than the node tolerance, HyperMesh tries to create a tria element
instead of a quad. If you create a model with characteristic dimensions
less than the node tolerance, reduce the default node tolerance.
geom tol The geometry tolerance specifies the mathematical accuracy of lines
and surfaces in the model. Lines and surfaces are guaranteed
geometrically accurate to within the distance specified by geom tol.
The geometry tolerance influences the speed of file i/o and geometric
operations in HyperMesh. Very small geometry tolerances can increase
file read times and increase the length of time required to perform
geometric operations. For typical automotive components in
millimeters, a geom tol of 1.000e-04 is usually accurate.
cleanup tol The cleanup tolerance specifies the maximum gap distance allowed
between two edges or points while performing geometry cleanup
operations. When a cleanup operation is performed, if two entities are
separated by a distance greater than the cleanup tol at any point along
their length, they are left unaltered.
fixed points A toggle to turn on or off the display of fixed points.
coincident node This is a new option for selecting coincident nodes. If the option is on,
picking coincident nodes are displayed evenly on a circle when the mouse
moves close.
shrink This option allows you to set shrink element sizes. In HyperMesh 3.0,
you can specify the size of element by entering a shrink factor between
0 and 1.
The graphics Subpanel

This is the new location for the graphics panel. New options are included. In addition, the hidden
lines field and resize box were moved here from the original option panel. Lighting tools for shaded
elements are also included in this subpanel. The performance graphic engine now contains bitmap
animation tools, view acceleration tools, and the result color type options.

bitmap animation Allows you to control the way a bitmap animation is created. Three options
are given: none, simple and compressed. When none is chosen, the
animation is created in the same way as in previous versions. If simple or
compressed is chosen, a bitmap is created based on the pixel number
instead of the number of elements. These two options are recommended
for larger models. Use the compressed option with the simple, or none
option if the computer swaps disk space during bitmap animation.
view acceleration Allows you to increase the rotation speed while viewing a model. This
option is especially useful if you work on a large model with a slow
machine. Three options (none, automatic, and Ctrl-Shift) with four
different simplification styles (feature line, bounding box, node cloud,
and element centroid) are available in this subpanel. For example, if the
Ctrl-Shift and feature line options are chosen during the rotation process
(clicking a or s on the permanent menu), the model changes to a feature
line based representation by pressing both the Ctrl and Shift function
keys. When automatic and feature line are both chosen, the model is
displayed in feature lines whenever it is rotated.
AVI file option Gives you three window sizes in making an AVI file: ¼ screen, 1/9 screen,
and full screen. You can also choose an 8 or 24 bit color display. When 8
bit is chosen, the color shown in the AVI file is discrete contour type. If 24
bit color is chosen, the color displayed in the AVI file is blended contour
type.
result color type Allows you to choose either blended or discrete contours when viewing a
contour plot. discrete contours gives a clear definition of contour
boundaries similar to centroidal or zbuffer mode in the previous version,
providing no gradual transition of colors.
fonts Retains the same functions the original font panel plus a new cursor size:
function. You can change the cursor size from standard to large. This
option is especially useful during a demonstration or teleconferencing.
colors Retains the same function as the original background panel with more
options introduced. In this panel, you can customize the color of the
background, global axis, axis label and the topological edge. In
addition, you can also change the menu background color. For the UNIX
platform, two options are given: dark and light. For PC, you can select
classic or windows, the desktop colors specified in the Windows Control
Panel.
page names Retains the same function as the original page name panel.
postscript Retains the same function as the original PostScript panel.
spaceball Retains the same function as the original Spaceball panel.

The display/vis Subpanels
The display and vis subpanels now contain an improved navigation tool to help you when working
with multiple pages. You can tab through a single page at a time, or go directly to a specified page
number. You can also display components by name, id, or both name and id. In the vis panel, the
default color of the mesh line is black.
Version 2.1 vs. 3.0 Panel Location

The following tables provide a list of the new page locations relative to the HyperMesh version 2.1
page order:
Page 1
Page 2
Page 3
Page 4
Page 5
A second table lists the HyperMesh panels alphabetically and gives the page on which the panel is
located.

Page 1
Panel Name HyperMesh 2.1 Location HyperMesh 3.0 Location
files 1,2,3,4,5 Geom, 1-D, 2-D, 3-D, BCs, Tool, Post
collectors 1,2,3,4 Geom, 1-D, 2-D, 3-D, BCs, Tool, Post
organize 1,2,3,4 Geom, 1-D, 2-D, 3-D, BCs, Tool, Post
color 1,2,3,4 Geom, 1-D, 2-D, 3-D, BCs, Tool, Post
temp nodes 1,2,3,4 Geom, 1-D, 2-D, 3-D, BCs, Tool, Post
import data 1,5 Moved to files panel (all seven pages)
create nodes 1 Geom
node edit 1 Geom
align node 1 Geom
distance 1 Geom
remap 1 Geom
lines 1 Geom
line edit 1 Geom
intersect 1 Geom
section cut 1 Geom
length 1 Geom
circles 1 Geom
tangents 1 Geom
fillets 1 Geom
reparam 1 Geom
reorder 1 Geom
surface edit 1 Geom
surf lines 1 Geom
stitch 1 Merged to geom cleanup
cntl cards 1 BCs
graphics 1 Permanent/option

Page 2
config edit 2 1-D, 2-D, 3-D
elem types 2 1-D, 2-D, 3-D
ruled 2 2-D
spline 2 2-D
drag 2 2-D, 3-D
spin 2 2-D, 3-D
line drag 2 2-D, 3-D
skin 2 2-D
automesh 2 2-D
planes 2 2-D
cones 2 2-D
spheres 2 2-D
torus 2 2-D
edit element 2 1-D, 2-D, 3-D
split 2 1-D, 2-D, 3-D
order change 2 1-D, 2-D, 3-D
replace 2 1-D, 2-D, 3-D
detach 2 1-D, 2-D, 3-D
smooth 2 2-D, 3-D
solid map 2 3-D
solid mesh 2 3-D
linear solid 2 3-D
solid offset 2 Renamed to elem offset (2-D, 3-D)
tetramesh 2 3-D

Page 3
linear 1d 3 1-D
masses 3 1-D
bars 3 1-D
rods 3 1-D
rigids 3 1-D
welds 3 1-D
springs 3 1-D
gaps 3 1-D
rbe3 3 1-D
translate 3 Tool
rotate 3 Tool
scale 3 Tool
reflect 3 Tool
project 3 Tool
position 3 Tool
permute 3 Tool
check elems 3 Tool
edges 3 Tool
faces 3 Tool
features 3 Tool
normals 3 Tool
dependency 3 Tool
mass 3 Tool
find 3 Tool
mask 3 Tool
delete 3 Tool
rename 3 Geom, 1-D, 2-D, 3-D, BCs, Tool, Post

Page 4
systems 4 Geom, 1-D, BCs
load types 4 BCs
constraints 4 BCs
forces 4 BCs
moments 4 BCs
pressures 4 BCs
velocity 4 BCs
accels 4 BCs
temperatures 4 BCs
flux 4 BCs
load steps 4 BCs
interfaces 4 BCs
rigid wall 4 BCs
entity sets 4 BCs
super elems 4 BCs
assemblies 4 Geom, 1-D, 2-D, 3-D, BCs, Tool,

Post
output block 4 BCs
numbers 4 Tool
renumber 4 Tool
summary 4 Tool
count 4 Tool
optimization 4 Renamed to design vars

Page 5
import data 1,5 Moved to files panel (all seven

pages)
export data 5 Moved to files panel (all seven

pages)
command 5 Moved to files panel (all seven

pages)
T convert 5 Enhanced and renamed to

convert (Tool)
hidden line 5 Post
contour 5 Post
vector plot 5 Post
titles 5 Post
deformed 5 Post
transient 5 Post
replay 5 Post
apply result 5 Post
xy plotting 5 Post
fd blocks 5 3-D
spaceball 5 Permanent/option
postscript 5 Permanent/option
background 5 Permanent/option
page names 5 Permanent/option
fonts 5 Permanent/option
build menu 5 Tool

Alphabetic Listing of Panels
Panel Name HyperMesh 3.0 Location
accels BCs
align node Geom
apply result Post
assemblies Geom, 1-D, 2-D, 3-D, BCs, Tool, Post
automesh 2-D
background Permanent/option
bars 1-D
build menu Tool
check elems Tool
circles Geom
cntl cards BCs
collectors Geom, 1-D, 2-D, 3-D, BCs, Tool, Post
color Geom, 1-D, 2-D, 3-D, BCs, Tool, Post
command Moved to files panel in all seven pages
cones 2-D
config edit 1-D, 2-D,3-D
constraints BCs
contour Post
count Tool
create nodes Geom
deformed Post
delete Tool
dependency Tool
detach 1-D, 2-D,3-D
distance Geom
drag 2-D, 3-D
edges Tool

edit element 1-D, 2-D,3-D
elem types 1-D, 2-D,3-D
entity sets BCs
export data Moved to files panel in all seven pages
faces Tool
fd blocks 3-D
features Tool
files Geom, 1-D, 2-D, 3-D, BCs, Tool, Post
fillets Geom
find Tool
flux BCs
fonts Permanent/option
forces BCs
gaps 1-D
hidden line Post
import data Moved to files panel in all seven pages
interfaces BCs
intersect Geom
length Geom
line drag 2-D, 3-D
line edit Geom
linear 1D 1-D
linear solid 3-D
lines Geom
load steps BCs
load types BCs
mask Tool
mass Tool
masses 1-D
moments BCs

node edit Geom
normals Tool
numbers Tool
optimization Renamed to design vars (BCs)
order change 1-D, 2-D,3-D
organize Geom, 1-D, 2-D, 3-D, BCs, Tool, Post
output block BCs
page names Permanent/option
permute Tool
planes 2-D
position Tool
postscript Permanent/option
pressures BCs
project Tool
rbe3 1-D
reflect Tool
remap Geom
rename Geom, 1-D, 2-D, 3-D, BCs, Tool, Post
renumber Tool
reorder Geom
reparam Geom
replace 1-D, 2-D,3-D
replay Post
rigid wall BCs
rigids 1-D
rods 1-D
rotate Tool
ruled 2-D
scale Tool
section cut Geom

skin 2-D
smooth 2-D, 3-D
solid map 3-D
solid mesh 3-D
solid offset Renamed to elem offset (2-D, 3-D)
spaceball Permanent/option
spheres 2-D
spin 2-D, 3-D
spline 2-D
split 1-D, 2-D,3-D
springs 1-D
stitch Merged in geom cleanup panel
summary Tool
super elem BCs
surf lines Geom
surface edit Geom
system Geom, 1-D, BCs
T convert Enhanced and renamed to convert (Tool)
tangents Geom
temp nodes Geom, 1-D, 2-D, 3-D, BCs, Tool, Post
temperatures BCs
tetramesh 3-D
titles Post
torus 2-D
transient Post
translate Tool
vector plot Post
velocity BCs
welds 1-D
xy plotting Post

Creating Macro Menus_HM-115
A macro is similar to a user-defined script, or executable. The user can write a macro specifically for
themselves that will execute a series of steps semi-automatically. The macro language is the same
language used in the command files generated by HyperMesh.
When creating a new macro the user must first decide if they want to add another page or place the
new macro button on a pre-existing page.
The following exercises are included:

• How to create another page
• How to create a new button
• How to create a macro
How to create another page

Inside of the hm.mac file, which is the user defined macro, the user will add a command to add an
additional page button. This button in turn will execute a macro that will create a new page.
To create another page in the macro menu:
1. Open up a new text file.

2. Type in *createbuttongroup(0,0,"User1",1,0,10,CYAN,"User defined
macros","macroSetActivePage",1)
3. Then create additional pages.
4. Type in *createbuttongroup(0,0,"User2",2,5,5,CYAN,"User defined
macros","macroSetActivePage",2)
5. Type in *createbuttongroup(0,0,"Name of page",2,5, 5,Color of page, "Description of what is on
the page","macroSetActivePage",3)
6. Type in *setactivegroup(0,0,1) to make the group 0 the active group.
Note: Any button placed on page 0 will be displayed on all pages.
7. Type in
*beginmacro(macroSetActivePage)
*setactivepage($1)
*endmacro()
Note: The page number was passed from the end of the button and retrieved in the macro with
the ($1).
8. Save the file as temp.mac.
Note: This is the macro that will allow the user to change from page to page.
Documentation for the *createbuttongroup and the *setactivepage command

can be found in the on-line help as well as the other above commands.

To create a new button:
1. Open the temp.mac file.

2. Type *createtext(1, “Shortcuts,17,0)
3. Type *createbutton(1, "geom clean", 16, 0, 10, BUTTON, "Geometry Cleanup
Panel", "macroEnterPanel", "geom cleanup")
4. Type *createbutton(1, “Spotweld, 3,0,10,GREEN,Spotweld along edges,
“macroSpotweldEdges)
5. Type *createbutton(2,User defined button,3,0,10,GREEN,Description of
what the macro will do, “The name of the macro, “Any arguments the user
wishes to pass to the macro)
Note: Arguments can be passed after the calling of the macro.
6. Type in the following macro to execute the macroEnterPanel:

*beginmacro("macroEnterPanel")
*enterpanel($1)
*endmacro()
Note: The page to enter was passed from the button and retrieved in the macro with the ($1).
The macro for the Spotweld Edges is in the next section.

Note: All of the above commands can be found in the on-line help.
To create a macro:
1. Open the temp.mac file.

2. Type in the macro for the SpotweldEdges:
*beginmacro(macroSpotweldEdges)
*createmarkpanel(elements,1,"select elements for independent

nodes")
*findedges(elements,1,0)
*renamecollector(components,"êdges","temp1")
*createmark(nodes,1) "by collector" temp1
*createmarkpanel(elements,2,"select elements for dependent

nodes")
*findedges(elements,2,0)
*createmark(nodes,2) "by collector" êdges
*createmultiplespotwelds(1,2,15,0,0,0,0,0,3,"")
*createmark(components,1) "temp1" “êdges

*deletemark(components,1)
*endmacro()
4. Open HyperMesh.
5. Select the options panel.
6. Select the menu config page.
7. Load your macro temp.mac.
8. Click retrieve .
Note: The above macro will find all of the nodes on the edges of the elements chosen and then
create weld elements between them. The macro works by first calling the macro from the
button that was created. Then it begins the macro.
The *createmarkpanel command is a command that allows the user to select a set of
elements from within HyperMesh similar to the extended entity selection window and
place them in a user-defined mark.
The next two commands simply find the edges of the elements selected and place them
into a temp1 collector.
Then the *createmark command takes the nodes found on the edges and places them
in a user mark.
The next three commands repeat the selection of elements, the finding of edges and then
the renaming of the collector.
Finally the *createmultiplespotwelds command takes the two user marks and
places spotwelds between them with the first set of nodes being the independent nodes
and the second set the dependent nodes. The last two commands remove the two-temp
collectors so that the macro can be repeated.

Geometry Creating and Editing - HM-120
This tutorial explains how to create lines and surfaces with the geometry creation panels found on the
Geom page. The lines, line edit, circles, fillet, and translate panels are included. There are also
instructions about using the spline panel to create a surface. The completed geometry of this
exercise is illustrated below.
Completed geometry.
administrator.
See Also
Creating a Component Collector and Nodes for Geometry
Creating Lines and Fillets
Clearing Temp Nodes and Creating Surfaces

Creating a Component Collector and Nodes for Geometry
To create a component collector for geometry:

3. Click name = and enter geometry.
4. Click the switch under creation method and select no card image.
6. Click create.
7. Click return to exit the collectors panel.
To create nodes:
1. Select the view panel on the permanent menu.

2. Click right.
3. Select the Geom page.
4. Select the create nodes panel.
5. Select the type in subpanel.
6. To create the nodes, enter the X, Y, and Z coordinates found in the following table and click
create after entering each set of coordinates.
node X Y Z
1 0 5 0
2 5 5 0
3 5 5 -1
4 7 5 -1
5 5.5 5 0.5
6 2 5 -5
7. Click return to exit the create nodes panel after you finish creating all six nodes.
To display the node IDs:
1. Select the tools page.

2. Select the numbers panel.
3. Click the input collector switch and select nodes.
4. Click nodes to display the extended entity selection menu.
5. Click all.
6. Click on to display all the node IDs.

Positions of the first 6 nodes.
Creating Lines and Fillets
To create lines:

2. Select the lines panel.
3. Pick node 1 and node 2.
4. Click create to create a line between nodes 1 and 2.
5. Pick node 3 and node 4.
6. Click create to create a line between nodes 3 and 4.
7. Click return to exit the lines panel.
To create a circle:
1. Select the circles panel.

2. Select the center and radius subpanel.
3. Pick node 6 as the node list at which the circle is to be created.
4. Click the plane and vector collector switch and select N1, N2, N3.
5. Pick any four nodes to define the plane and the base for the axis of rotation.
6. Click radius and enter 5.0.
7. Click create.
8. Click return to exit the circles panel.

To edit lines by splitting at a line:
1. Select the line edit panel.

2. Select the split at line subpanel.
3. Click lines and pick the upper horizontal line.
4. Click cut line and pick the circle.
5. Click split.
To edit lines by splitting at a plane:
1. Select the split at plane subpanel.

2. Click lines and pick the circle.
3. Click the plane and vector collector switch and select x-axis.
4. Click base and pick node 6 to define the base.
5. Click split.
6. Click return to exit the line edit panel.
To create a fillet and delete a line segment:
1. Select the fillets panel.

3. Click the toggle and select trim.
st
4. Click 1 line. and pick the line between nodes 3 and 4.
nd
5. Click 2 line and pick the circle.
Two X’s are displayed to allow you to specify the quadrant in which you want the fillet created.
6. Select the upper quadrant for the fillet.
7. Press the F2 function key to access the delete panel.
8. Click the input collector switch and select lines.
9. Pick the line segment attached to node 2.
10. Pick the right half of the circle.
11. Click delete.
12. Click return to exit the delete panel.
13. Click return again to exit the fillets panel.

To combine and smooth lines:

2. Select the combine subpanel.
3. Pick the adjacent lines until all the segments are combined.
4. Select the split at joints subpanel.
5. Pick the line to view the joints in the line.
The joints are displayed as red ‘V’s. Do not split the line.
6. Select the smooth line subpanel.
7. Pick the line.
8. Click smooth.
9. Select the split at joint subpanel.
10. Pick the line.
A message is displayed that states, “The line does not contain any joints. If there are still joints in
the line, repeat the smooth function.
To duplicate and translate lines:
1. Select the translate panel on the tools page.

3. Pick the line.
4. Click lines again to display the extended entity selection menu.
5. Click duplicate.
6. Click current comp to copy the new line into the current component.
7. Click view.
8. Click iso1.
9. Click the plane and vector collector switch and select y-axis.
10. Click magnitude = and enter 5.0.
11. Click translate -.
12. Click p on the permanent menu.
13. Click return to exit the translate panel.
To create additional lines:

3. Pick node 1.
4. Click and hold down the left mouse button over the new line until a box cursor appears and lift
when the line is highlighted.

5. Pick the right end of the line to create a temporary node.
6. Click create.
7. Pick node 4.
8. Click and hold down the left mouse button over the new line until a box cursor appears and lift
when the line is highlighted.
9. Pick the left end of the line to create a temporary node.
10. Click create.
11. Click return.
To create additional nodes:
1. Select the create nodes panel.

3. To create the nodes, enter the X, Y, and Z coordinates found in the following table and click
create after entering each set of coordinates.
node X Y Z
9 2 5 1
10 2 2 1
11 2 5 0
12 2 2 0
13 2 5 4
4. Click return.
To display the node IDs:
1. Select the Tool page.

4. Click nodes to display the extended entity selection menu.
5. Click all.
6. Click return.
To create a circle and an arc:

2. Select the circles panel.
3. Select the center & radius subpanel.
4. Pick node 13.
5. Click the plane and vector collector switch and select x-axis.

7. Make sure the toggle is set to circle.
8. Click create.
9. Click the toggle to change to arc.
10. Pick node 13.
11. Click angle = and enter 180.
12. Click radius = and enter 1.0.
13. Click create.
14. Click return to exit the circles panel.
To create a tangent line:
1. Select the tangents panel.

2. Click the input collector switch and select node list.
3. Pick node 10 or 12.
4. Click line.
5. Pick the circle that was created.
6. Click find tangent.
Two potential tangent lines are displayed.
7. Pick the vertical line.
The tangent line is created.
8. Click return to exit the tangents panel.
To edit the lines:

2. Select the split at plane subpanel.
3. Pick the circle as the line to be split.
4. Click the plane and vector switch and select y-axis.
5. Click base and pick node 1.
6. Click split.
7. Pick the left half of the circle.
8. Click the plane and vector switch and select x-axis.
9. Click base and pick node 13.
10. Click split.

To delete designated line segments:
1. Select the delete panel.

3. Pick any lines in your model that do not appear in the following illustration.
Rear view of lines created for the hitch model.
4. Click delete.
5. Click return to exit the delete panel.
To create additional lines:

3. Pick nodes 10 and 12.
4. Click create.
5. Click and hold the left mouse button until the box cursor appears and the center arc is
highlighted.
6. Pick each end of the arc to create a temporary node at each end.
7. Click and hold the left mouse button until the box appears and the outer arc is highlighted.
8. Pick at the end of that arc to place a temporary node there.

9. Use the arrow keys on the permanent menu to rotate the model as necessary to create the line
segments that define the bracket and the remainder of the hitch geometry.
10. Create a line between nodes 9 and 10.
11. Create a line between nodes 11 and 12.
Completed geometry of the hitch model.
12. Click return.
Clearing Temp Nodes and Creating Surfaces
To clear all temp nodes:

2. Select the temp nodes panel.
3. Click clear all.
4. Click return to exit the temp nodes panel.

To create a surface from lines:
1. Select the 2D page.

2. Select the spline panel.
3. Pick the four lines on the plate portion of the model.
4. Click the center switch and select surface only.
5. Click create.
The surface appears as illustrated below. (Only the surface is displayed in this illustration.)
Surface created by using the spline panel.

Geometry Clean Up - HyperMesh-130
This lesson introduces the geom cleanup panel. This panel is used to prepare surface geometry for
meshing. The gaps, overlaps and misalignments that occur when surfaces are imported into
HyperMesh can prevent the automesher from creating quality meshes. By eliminating misalignments
and holes and by suppressing the boundaries between adjacent surfaces, you can automesh across
larger, more logical regions of the model and improve overall meshing speed and quality.
The following topics are included:

• HyperMesh 4.0 Terminology
• Geom cleanup panel features
• Surface edit/filler surface subpanel
• Using the geom cleanup and surface edit panels
administrator.
See Also
The HyperMesh Panels On-line Help for more information on the geom cleanup panel features.
HyperMesh 4.0 Terminology
New HyperMesh terminology

face A single NURB; the smallest area entity.
surface A collection of one or more adjacent faces whose common edges are
suppressed. HyperMesh meshes on surfaces.
free edge The edge is owned by one surface. In the geom cleanup panel, the
default color is red.
shared edge The edge is owned by two adjacent surfaces. In the geom cleanup
panel, the default color is green.
suppressed edge The edge is owned, or shared, by two adjacent surfaces. It is

transparent to the meshing routine. In the geom cleanup panel, the
default color is blue.
non-manifold edge The edge is owned by three or more surfaces. In the geom cleanup
panel, the default color is yellow.
fixed point A point associated with a surface. A fixed point is displayed as a small
circle (o) and is the same color as the surface to which it is associated.
The automesher places a finite element node at fixed points.
free point A point in space not associated with a surface. A free point is
displayed as a small x, (x), and is the same color as the geometry
collector to which it belongs.
Geom Cleanup Panel Features
geom cleanup, edges subpanel menu
cleanup tol = The tolerance used to determine if two surface edges or two surface vertices
should be considered as one.
Note:
Values for cleanup tol= can be specified in two locations. The global value
for cleanup tol= is in the options/modeling subpanel. The local value for
cleanup tol =, which is used for a specific cleanup operation, is in the geom
cleanup panel. Sometimes, operations performed by the local cleanup
tolerance can be lost by a global cleanup tolerance overriding it.
An example of this is splitting a surface which was created by utilizing a local

cleanup tolerance. Since the surface edit panel uses the global cleanup
tolerance, all of the edges of the new surfaces will be reevaluated by
HyperMesh to determine their cleaned up status.

It is recommended that a large value (reasonable with respect to the element
size) be used for the cleanup tol= in the options/modeling subpanel. For
example, for an element edge length of 10, a cleanup tol of 0.1 (10/100) or
.05 (10/500) should be used.
visual options Enables user to control display mode of surfaces and edges. View surfaces
in wire frame or shaded mode. Display on/off surface edge types.
edges subpanel Used to remove gaps and overlaps between surfaces and to merge surfaces
together by modifying the edges of the surfaces.
toggle Convert individual surface edges from one edge type to another with single
mouse clicks. Free edge ⇒ shared edge ⇔ suppressed edge (red ⇒
green ⇔ dotted blue).
replace Combine two free edges into a shared edge. Free edge ⇒ shared edge
(red ⇒ green).
(un)suppress Suppress or unsuppress a number of edges simultaneously. Shared edge

⇔ suppressed edge (green ⇔ dotted blue).
equivalence Convert free edges between adjacent surfaces to shared edges. Free edge
⇒ shared edge. (red ⇒ green).
geom cleanup, surfaces subpanel
surfaces subpanel Used to delete duplicate surfaces, remove surface holes, organize
surfaces.
find duplicates Find and delete duplicate surfaces. Non-manifold edge ⇒ shared or
free edge (yellow ⇒ green or red).
organize by feature Combine surfaces based on fillets. Shared edge ⇔ suppressed edge
(green ⇔ dotted blue).
move faces Stitch faces to an existing surface or stitch faces to create a new
surface. Shared edge ⇔ suppressed edge (green ⇔ dotted blue).
geom cleanup, fixed points subpanel

fixed points subpanel Used to add, replace, and suppress fixed points.
add Create fixed points from existing free points or nodes.
replace Delete point to be moved and relocate associated geometry to
retained point.
suppress Delete unnecessary fixed points or convert fixed points to free points.
Surface Edit/Filler Surface Subpanel

filler surface Fill in a hole in CAD data by selecting lines, nodes, or points. Similar to the
spline panel, with the exception that points cannot be selected in the
spline panel.
Note: In the surface edit panel, the lines from surface edge subpanel no longer exists. In
most panels, surface edges can be used as lines.
Using the Geom Cleanup and Surface Edit Panels

In this exercise, you use the geom cleanup panel and the filler surface subpanel of the surface edit
panel to import surface geometry and prepare it for meshing.
To import surface geometry data file:

2. Select the import subpanel.
3. Double-click translator =.
4. Select iges, or if you are using a Windows version, select iges.exe.
5. Double-click file name =.

6. Select raw_iges_data.iges.
7. Click import.
8. Click return.
9. Review the iges.msg message file.
In the iges.msg file, there are zero error and zero warning messages.
The message file has an .msg extension and is created in the directory in which HyperMesh was
invoked. After you import any file, it is good practice to review the message file for import errors.
In the files / import subpanel, use file geom tolerance and use automatic cleanup tol are
default settings. It is recommended that these settings be used when you import CAD data files
into HyperMesh for the first time. Experienced users may want to override the default settings
based on prior knowledge with similar files. These options can be toggled to geom tol = and
cleanup tol =. For information about these tolerances and how to use them, see HyperMesh
Help.
The file geometry tolerance for this file is 1.E-06. File geometry tolerance is recorded in iges files
at the top of the files. For this exercise, the iges file’s top section follows:

HyperMesh Iges Preprocessor S0000001
1H,,1H;,15HHypermesh Model,9Htas2.iges,17HHyperMesh v3.0b10,4Hv1.0,32, G0000001
38,6,308,15,15HHypermesh Model,1.,2,2HYPERMESHM,1,0.,13H980709.084600,1.E-06,, G0000002
5HYPERMESHr. X,1HX,10,0,13H980709.084600; G0000003
116 1 0 0 1 0 0 000000000D0000001
116 0 0 1 0 0 0D0000002
To display surface IDs:

3. Click the input collector switch and select surfs.
4. Click surfs and select all on the extended entity selection pop-up window.
5. Click on.
The IDs for the displayed surfaces are displayed.
6. Click return.
To renumber surfaces:

2. Select the renumber panel.
4. Click surfs and select all on the extended entity selection pop-up window.
5. Click renumber.
The header bar displays the message, “12 surfs ranging from 1 to 12. Completed Through ID: 0.
6. Click return.
The new surface IDs are displayed in the graphics area.

Renumbered and displayed surface IDs
To save this work session as a HyperMesh database file:

3. Click file = and enter geomcleanup.hm.
4. Click save.
The header bar displays the message, “The file has been saved.
5. Click return.
To create non-solver specific component collectors:

2. Click the switch after collector type: and select comps.
3. Click name = and enter top.
4. Click the switch under creation method and select no card image.
5. If there is a name in the field following material =:
- Click material =.
- Click return.
The input field is now clear of that name.
6. Click color.
7. Select Color 5.
8. Click create.
A component collector named top, with a default material collector named top, is created.
9. Repeat steps 3-9 to create three more component collectors named middle1, with Color 4,
middle2, with Color 10, and bottom, with Color 9.
10. Click return.

To organize surfaces into component collectors:

2. Move surfaces to the bottom component collector:
- Click the input collector switch and select surfs.
- Pick surfaces 10, 11, and 12.
- Click destination =.
- Select bottom.
- Click move.
3. Use the above procedure to move surfaces 3, 6, 8, and 9 to the middle1 component collector.
Surface 3 is hidden beneath surface 8.
4. Use the same procedure to move surfaces 4, 5, and 7 to the middle2 component collector.
5. Use the same procedure to move surfaces 1 and 2 to the top component collector.
6. Click return.
To save this work session:

geomcleanup.HyperMesh. is displayed after file =.
3. Click save.
A dialog box displays the message “geomcleanup.HyperMesh exists. Overwrite? (y/n).
4. Click Yes.
5. Click return.
To change surface edges from free to shared using edges/equivalence subpanel:

2. Select the geom cleanup panel.
3. Select the edges subpanel.
4. Click the equivalence radio button.
5. Click surfs and select displayed.
6. Click cleanup tol = and enter .05.
7. Click equivalence.
The message, “All surface edges within tolerance combined, is displayed in the header bar.
Some free surface edges (red) became shared edges (green).
To identify and delete duplicate surfaces:
1. Select the surfaces subpanel.

2. Click the find duplicates radio button.
3. Click faces and select displayed from the extended entity selection pop-up window.

4. Click find.
The message, “One face is duplicated, is displayed in the header bar.
5. Click delete.
The message, “One face was deleted, is displayed in the header bar.
To locate problem areas in geometry:
1. Click visual options.

2. Click the toggle to change from wireframe to shaded.
3. Click r on the permanent menu to rotate and view model.
The most obvious problems are a non-manifold edge, a missing surface between surfaces 10 and
11, and in the corner where surfaces 1, 3, 5, and 7 meet.
5. Click the toggle to change from shaded to wireframe.
To delete interior surface holes:
1. Measure the hole diameter:

- Press the F4 function key to access the distance panel.
- Select the two nodes subpanel.
- Select any one of the three circles on surface 2:
- Press and hold left mouse button in the graphics area until the cursor changes into a
white square with a dot in the middle of it.
- Pick the circle and release the left mouse button.
- Pick a point on the highlighted circle.
- A green node is placed on the circle.
- Pick a point on the same circle that is across from the green node .
- A blue node is displayed on the circle.
- The number in the input field following distance = is a value less than 3.
- Click return.
- The geom cleanup panel is still displayed.
2. Select Defeature panel.
3. Select the pinholes radio button.
4. Click surfs and select displayed from the extended entity selection pop-up window.
5. Click diameter < and enter 3.
6. Click find.
There is a P in the center of the four circles in the graphics area. The smallest diameter for each
of the circles is less than 3.
7. The two Ps in the two circles on surface 2 that aren’t centered are highlighted white.
8. Click delete.
The two circles are deleted from the database.

Note: HyperMesh finds circular and non-circular shaped holes; the holes don’t need
to be perfect circles. The diameter is treated as a characteristic dimension.
To combine two free edges into a shared edge using surfaces / replace subpanel:

2. Click replace on left side of menu panel.
3. Pick the surface 10 edge that is parallel and closest to a surface 11 edge.
4. Pick the surface 11 edge that is parallel and closest to the surface 10 edge just selected.
5. Click replace on the right side of the menu panel.
The header bar displays the message, “Gap distance (0.602170) is larger than specified
tolerance.
6. Click cleanup tol = and enter 0.61.
7. Repeat steps 3 - 5.
Note: Do not set the cleanup tolerance to unreasonably high values. New edges are
generated based on the cleanup tolerance. The cleanup tolerance not only affects
the selected entities, but it affects the edges that touch the selected entities at
vertices. The generated edges are accurate only to within the set cleanup tolerance.
As a result, if unreasonably high tolerances are used, small gaps can increase in
distance up to the set tolerance.
The geom cleanup edges / toggle subpanel can also be used to combine the
surface 10 and 11 edges.
If the shortest distance between two surface edges is greater than the intended
element size, do not use this function. Instead, use the surface filler subpanel on
the surface edit panel. Create a filler surface and toggle surface edges to
suppressed edges accordingly. Another panel that can be used is the drag geoms
subpanel in the drag panel.
To replace a fixed point:
1. Select the fixed points subpanel.

2. Click the replace radio button.
3. Zoom into the corner of surface 9 which borders surface 1 and is on the perimeter of model.
4. Pick the surface 1 corner node.
5. Pick the surface 9 corner node.
6. Click replace.
The surface 9 corner node is replaced with the surface 1 corner node.

To combine free edges to create shared edges using the edges/toggle subpanel:

2. Select the toggle radio button.
3. Click f on the permanent menu to fit displayed components to the graphics area.
4. Pick surface 3 free edge adjacent to surface 1.
The surface edge becomes green. The surface edge selected in the edges/toggle subpanel is
the retained edge. The other edge, which is found automatically, is the edge which is moved.
5. Pick the surface 9 free edge adjacent to surface 1.
8. Pick any other interior free edges.
10. Deactivate the shared edges check box to turn the display of these edges off.
11. Deactivate the fixed points to turn the display of these points off.
Only the free edges that define the model perimeter and the interior holes remain.
13. Activate the shared edges check box to turn display of the edges on.
14. Activate the fixed points check box to turn display of the points on.
To stitch surfaces:
1. Click (un)suppress.
2. Pick the line between surfaces 4 and 6.
3. Pick the line between surfaces 3 and 5.
4. Pick the two linear lines between surfaces 3 and 9.
5. Click suppress.
The selected lines change from shared (green) to suppressed (blue) edges.
6. Click return.
The suppressed surface edges are not displayed in the graphics area. They still exist in the
model and can be toggled back to shared edges in the geom cleanup panel.
Note: The resulting stitched surface is located in the component collector of the stitched surface
having the lowest id. As a result of surfaces 4 and 6 being stitched together, the stitched
surface is located in middle2 component collector where surface 4 was originally
located. As a result of surfaces 3, 5, and 9 being stitched together, the stitched surface is
located in middle1 component collector where surface 3 was originally located.
In the geom cleanup panel, HyperMesh treats lines and surface edges the same. It is
recommended that lines be displayed off or masked so that surface edges can be
selected more easily.

To use the surface edit / filler surface subpanel:
1. Select surface edit.

2. Click filler surface.
3. Zoom into the corner in which surfaces 1, 3, and 7 meet.
4. Click the three lines in the graphics area. Each line is between two fixed points.
The selected lines are highlighted white.
5. Click create.
Question dialog box pops-up stating “Lines appear planar, project to plane? (y/n).
6. Click Yes.
A surface was created using the selected three lines.
7. Click return.
8. Click geom cleanup.
9. Click edges.
10. Click toggle.
11. Of the three lines selected in surface edit / filler surface subpanel, pick the line closest to the
center of the model. The shared (green) edges are suppressed (blue).

Defeature Panel - HM-131
The defeature panel, located on the Geom page, provides tools to help remove unwanted features in
geometry, e.g. edge and surface fillets, holes etc. The tools remove features and create any
necessary filler surfaces as a substitution.
• Remove trim lines
• Remove Pin Holes
• Remove surface fillets and make sharp corners using the parameters specified
• Remove edge/line fillets using the specified parameters
• Trim-Intersect to remove edge fillets by selecting two points of tangency around the fillet
Remove Trim Lines

Remove trim lines can be used to retrive the original surfaces from which the current surfaces were
trimmed. It can also be used to remove the interior trim lines of a surface. Interior trim lines are any
free edges that are entirely contained within a surface’s boundary.
In this example, we will remove the interior trim lines by specifying one of the lines:
1. Retrieve the HM database file defeature.hm.
2. Go to the defeature panel on the Geom page.

3. Select trim lines subpanel.
4. Click the toggle below remove and select interior trim lines.
5. Click lines and select one of the interior trim lines defining one of the small rectanglular cut outs
on the top center surface. Alternately, click in the lines box and select displayed from the
extended selection menu.
6. Click untrim to remove the interior trim lines.
Note: The other option under remove is to remove all trim lines. This function allows you to
specify a surface and will return the original, untrimmed surface information. Depending
on the CAD package and method used to create these surfaces, the results of this
operation will vary.

Surface Fillets
This function can be used to remove surface fillets, or fillets between two non-coplanar surfaces. The
rounded fillet surface will be replaced by a planar, tangential extention of the adjacent surfaces.
Fillets may be specified by selecting the fillet profile as a line, or by specifying a surface and range of
fillet radii.
To search the surface fillets by min/max radius:
1. Retrieve the hm file defeature.hm.

2. Select the surf fillets subpanel.
3. Select the toggle for surfaces to search: and select surfs.
4. Click in the surfs box and select displayed.
5. Set the fillet params as follows: Min radius = 5.0; Max radius = 15.000
6. Click find fillets.
Figure 1: Use the radius parameters of an example fillet profile to identify surface fillets.
Note: At this point, a new subpanel appears where you can be specific about selecting the fillet
to be removed, fillet ends and edge associativity. Ignore edge association can be used
to verify or modify the selection of edges whose adjacent surface geometry will be
ignored in favor of using the selected fillet surface’s geometry when calculating the
tangent surface. This is commonly used if the adjacent surface has a very high degree of
curvature compared to the fillet, or if the edge in question is a free edge. Fillet ends can
be used to verify or modify fillet ends. Unless a string of fillets makes a complete loop and
closes upon itself, you should see at least two fillet end lines.
7. Click remove to delete the rounded fillet surfaces and replace them with an intersecting, planar
surface tangent to the fillet surface edge.

Figure2: After removing surface fillets, adjacent surfaces are extended along the tangent until they intersect.

Edge Fillets
This option can be used to remove any edge fillets on a free surface edge. HyperMesh can identify
these fillets given a range of fillet radii and a minimum arc angle. Using these filtering options, you
can find the fillets in your model and then remove them.
To remove fillets:

2. Go to geom page and defeature panel.
3. Go to edge fillets subpanel.
4. Click on surfs and select the end surface in the extreme +X and –Z direction of the model. Set
the radius and angle values as follows: Min radius = 5.0; Max radius = 15.000; Min angle =
15.000.
5. Click find. The fillets will be identified with a blue F and lines indicating the beginning and ending
points of tangency of the fillets.
6. Select both of the fillets to be removed. Alternately, click the fillets button and select all from the
pop up list.
7. Click remove to eliminate the fillets by projecting the surface edges from the point of tangency
until they intersect.
Figure 3: Use the edge fillet function to identify and remove rounded corners on free-surface edges.

Trim-Intersect
The trim intersect function works like the edge fillet function, except the points of tangency are
specified by clicking on the free-surface edge.
To trim points:
1. Rotate the model to center the view to the end surface in the most –X and –Z direction.
2. Select the trim-intersect subpanel.
st
3. With the blue box highlighting node under 1 edge trim location:, select the trim point (point of
tangency) for one of the edge fillets, as shown in the figure below.
Figure 4: Click on points of tangency of the edge fillets to square off rounded corners on free-surface edges.
4. Select the second point of tangence for this edge fillet.

Note: In this panel, HM is expecting a point to be defined on a surface edge. A temporary node
will be created. After selecting the second point, the trimming and de-filleting operation
will occur.
5. Repeat these steps for the remaining free-edge fillets.

Note: Using a size 10 quad plate element, compare the resulting mesh for the defeatured
model to the original model.
6. Click return to go back to the main menu.

7. Go to the automesh panel on the 2-D page.
8. In the create mesh subpanel, click the surfs box and select all.

9. Click the toggle next to interactive and select the automatic mode.
10. Click mesh to generate the mesh.
Figure 5: Size 10 quad plate mesh after defeaturing the part.
Figure 6: Size 10 quad plate mesh without defeaturing the part.

Note: In these excersises, we used the functions in the defeature panel to simplify the
geometry of a small part. The remove trim lines function was used to eliminate two
rectangular cut outs on the top surface. The surface fillet function was used to remove
the curved fillets where the top surface transitioned to the sides. Edge fillet and Trim-
intersect were used to square off the end surfaces. The results of these operations will
yield a more regular, geometric mesh.

Automesh Module - HM-135L
The automesh module has the ability to automatically mesh specified surfaces given an element
edge length. The module also has the ability to interactively select and mesh multiple surfaces. It
can increase biasing, density, change mesh parameters, and element types all before accepting the
mesh. Once the mesh is created, the remesh button can be used to re-mesh the surfaces.

• Layout of Automesh panel
• The Use of Automeshing Modules and Remesh Function
• Cleanup Surface and Add Fixed Points
• Refine Element Quality by Remeshing Elements
File Needed:
• Cleaned_Up-Geom.hm31
Layout of Automesh Panel

The automesh panel includes six sub-panels : create mesh, mesh params, cleanup, add points,
remove points, and proj to edge.
Figure 1 – Create Mesh subpanel
There are two options in the create mesh sub-panel. The toggle allows you to alternate between the
interactive and automatic selection. The default is interactive. The interactive option is used to
automesh multiple surfaces or elements with user-controlled parameters. Once a surface or a group
of elements have been selected for the automeshing module, the information is retained and updated
with any changes to meshing parameters while in the automeshing module. The next time the
selected entity, either surfaces or a group of elements, is brought into the automeshing module, the
saved data is used unless the reset mesh parameters to: button is selected, in which case the old
information is discarded and new values are computed.
The meshing parameters can be set to either element size with element shape or use mesh
params. When the mesh params option is used, the mesh can be created by use chordal
deviation mesh or use size and biasing. This tutorial uses the element size option. The options
when using use mesh params are illustrated in tutorials HM-140 and HM-141.
The toggle between elements to current comp and elements to surface’s comp tells HyperMesh
where these newly created elements should be located. You can put created elements in the
associated surface components or the global current working component where you define them.
After clicking the green mesh button, the automeshing module will be displayed allowing you to
adjust element density and biasing of all the shared and free edges belonging to the selected

surfaces, change element type, and perform quality checks. Once the elements are created, you
may select surfaces that contain bad elements or a group of elements, and you can refine them by
clicking the remesh button. HyperMesh will first delete the existing elements and then re-mesh the
selected entity.
The highlight surfs button, below the find mesh error, directs HyperMesh to scan through all the
selected surfaces for mesh and highlight those failed in creating meshes in your last attempt.
If you select to refine a group of elements by changing the switch from surfs to elems, you can
decide whether you want to break connectivity between the selected group of elements and the rest
of the elements by activating a small check mark in front of the break connectivity option.
The Automatic panel has the same features as the interactive panel. The only difference is it
creates elements on surfaces without bringing up the automeshing modules.
The Mesh params sub-panel is divided into two parts. The left part contains options and settings
for use chordal deviation meshing algorithm described in HM-141. The right part contains options
for the use size and biasing meshing algorithm described in tutorial HM-140.
Figure 2 – Mesh Parameters subpanel, Use size and biasing.
Figure 3 – Mesh Parameters subpanel, Use chordal deviation.
The cleanup sub-panel consists of four features: split surf, unsplit surf, replace points, and
toggle. Split surf has the same function as trim with two nodes located at the surface edit panel.
After choosing two nodes on a selected surface, HyperMesh creates a line between these two
nodes, and uses this line to trim the selected surface at the normal direction.
Unsplit surf has the same function as remove interior trim lines in the surface edit panel. This
feature not only removes trim lines from associated surfaces, but also deletes them from the model.
A useful example of this feature is to remove pinholes. Replace points has the same function as
replace points in the geom cleanup panel. The details of using this function are described in
tutorial HM-130-Geometry Clean Up. Toggle has the same function as edge/toggle in the geom
cleanup panel. The detail of using this function is also described in the tutorial HM-130-Geometry
Clean Up.

Figure 4 – Cleanup subpanel
The Add points has the same function as the add points subpanel in the geom cleanup panel. It
creates fixed points from free points or nodes, and makes those fixed points associated with the
selected surfaces. The detail of using this function is described in the tutorial HM-130-Geometry
Clean Up.
Figure 5 – Add Points subpanel
The Remove points subpanel has the same function as the suppress points subpanel in the
geomcleanup panel. It deletes unnecessary fixed points or converts fixed points to free points. The
detail of using this function is described in the tutorial HM-130-Geometry Clean Up.
Figure 5.5 – Remove Points subpanel
The Proj to edge sub-panel will locate all interior fixed points on a set of surfaces, then project each
of these points to the nearest (perpendicular) edge location on its own surface only. This produces
mesh patterns that are more regular in appearance.
The distance tolerance and angle tolerance are parameters used to control creation of fixed points.
If the shortest distance between an edge and an interior fixed point is less than or equal to the
distance tolerance, a fixed point will be created on the edge. If the angle ABC, formed by an existing
fixed point on an edge (A), the fixed point to-be-created (B) and the interior fixed point (C), is less
than the angle tolerance, a fixed point will not be created.
Figure 6 – Project to Edge subpanel

The Use of Automeshing Modules and Remesh Function
In this exercise you will first interactively mesh selected surfaces, then apply various automeshing
modules, remesh selected surfaces, and finally delete all the elements using remesh button.
To retrieve the Cleaned_Up_Geom.hm31 file and display surf ids:
1. Retrieve the Clean_Up_Geom.hm31 file.

− Enter the files panel on any page of the main menu.
− Click hm file and file = cleaned_up_geom.hm31.
− Click retrieve to clear current session and pull up the file.
− Click return to exit the panel and return to main menu.
2. Display all the surface IDs.
− Enter the numbers panel under Tool page.
− Change selection to surfs.
− Click surfs to bring up the extended entity selection window.
− Select all surfaces in figure.
− Click the on button.
Figure 7

To interactively automesh and use the automeshing module:
1. Go to the global panel, set the currents: comp = bottom, enter element size=2.0 and click
return. The element type is kept as the default setting, quad.
2. Enter the automesh panel through 2D page and go to the create mesh subpanel. Make sure the
toggle remains in interactive.
3. Switch from elements to current comp to elements to surface’s comp.
4. Select surfs and select surface id 6, and 7 (see Figure 7).
5. Click mesh. The automesh modules including density, algorithm, type, biasing, details, and
checks will be displayed in the main menu area.
6. Click mesh button and review the temporary mesh.
Note: Select the checks panel, and then click on warpage panel to check warpage value.
Notice that the maximum warpage found is equal to 35.21.
7. Click the radio button in front of algorithm module to activate the function.
Note: The small square icons on the center of surface id 6 and 7 indicate that HyperMesh will
use mapped as rectangle meshing algorithm to create the mesh.
8. Change the meshing algorithm:

− Click mesh button and review the temporary mesh setting.
− Click the switch below the meshing algorithm and choose free (unmapped).
Note: The free (unmapped) option allows HyperMesh to mesh freely.
− Move the mouse and click the square icon located at the center of surface id 6. The icon will
show the new meshing algorithm.
− Click on mesh again and examine how the mesh changes.
Note: Select the checks panel, and then click on warpage panel to check warpage value.
Notice that now the maximum warpage found is equal to 6.12. Which is a significant
improvement if compared to the previous value 35.21 by using mapped as rectangle
meshing algorithm.
− Click the switch below the meshing algorithm and choose mapped as triangle.
− Move the mouse and click the square icon located at the center of surface id 6. The icon will
change to a triangle shape.
− Click on mesh and examine the error appeared on the menu bar.
Note: The mapped as triangle algorithm should be applied to a surface with three sides only.
The mapped as pentagon algorithm should be applied to a surface with five sides only.
− Repeat the same steps to change the meshing algorithm back to autodecide.
− Click set all button on the right side of meshing algorithm. This step is to apply autodecide
option on all the selected surfaces.
− Click mesh button.
9. Change the smoothing algorithm:
− Click the switch below the smoothing algorithm and choose shape corrected.
− Click set all button to apply the algorithm to all the selected surfaces.
− Click smooth button and examine the change of the mesh.

Note: Select the checks panel, check warpage and note that Max warpage is now 31.22.
− Click the switch below the smoothing algorithm and choose no smoothing.
− Click set all button to apply the algorithm to all the selected surfaces.
− Click smooth button and examine the change of the mesh.
12. Change the smoothing algorithm back to autodecide.
13. Change the meshing algorithm back to autodecide.
14. Click mesh.
15. Activate the type module to check the element type that will be used to generate the mesh. Three
element types, quad, tria and mixed are available.
16. Change the meshing element type to mixed:
− Click on the switch below the element type: and choose mixed.
− Click on set all button.
− Click on mesh and examine the change of mesh on those selected surfaces.
15. Change the meshing element type to quads:
− Click on the switch below the element type: and choose quads.
− Click on set all button.
− Click on mesh and examine the change of mesh on those selected surfaces
Note: The mixed element type is only applied to four side surfaces meshed using the mapped
as rectanglar algorithm.
Note: The toggle surf panel allows users manually change element type.
16. Click the radio button in front of details module to activate the function.
17. Change the mapping parameters:
− Click on a small diamond shape icon located at the center of surface id 6.

− Click the check box in front of size control to activate this function. A check will appear in
the box.
− Click mesh button and examine the change of mesh.
− Click the check box in front of size control again to disable this function.
− Click the check box in front of skew control to activate this function. A check will appear in
the box.
− Click mesh button and examine the change of mesh.
− Click the check box in front of size control to activate this function. A check will reappear in
the box. Now both skew control and size control are activated.
− Click mesh button and examine the change of mesh
− Click the check boxes for size control and skew control. Both functions are now disabled.
Note: The mesh generated by either type of element shape will be influenced by the size
control and the skew control.
18. Click the radio button in front of the density module to activate the function.
19. Change the element density on selected edges:
− Click the number field next to the element density= and enter 10.

− Click set edge to button.
− Move cursor to graphic area and click on density numbers located at top two long edges and
bottom two long edges (see Figure 8)
− Click the number field next to the element density= and enter 3.
− Click set edge to button.
− Move cursor to graphic area and click on density numbers located at three short edges (see
Figure 8).
Figure 8
1. Click the radio button in front of biasing module to active this function.
2. Change the element biasing on selected edges:
− Click on the switch under bias style:, select bellcurve biasing style.
− Click green set all panel on the left side of bellcurve in order to activate this style.
− Click the number field next to bias intensity = and enter -0.500
− Click the set edge box
− Click the shared edges between surface id 4 and surface id 6, and do the same step at one
free edge of surface id 7 (see Figure 9).
− Click the mesh button.

Figure 9
1. Click the radio button in front of checks module to activate this function.
2. Check the element quality:
− Click the number field next to jacobian and enter 0.92
− Click the jacobian button and examine the graphic area. Any element fails to meet the
specified jacobian value will be highlighted. The minimum jacobian value will be indicated in
the menu bar.
− Click skew button to check the skew quality.
3. Click the return to accept the mesh.
4. Mesh surface id 4.
− In the interactive sub-panel, select surface id 4.
− Click mesh. Review the temporary node and element placements.
Note: Make sure not to check the box in front of the reset the mesh parameters to. The
densities will automatically match the previously meshed bottom surfaces and have
coincident nodes. The default node densities set in the global are assigned elsewhere
around the surfaces. The use of reset meshing parameters to: will override the
automatic coincident matching feature.

− Click adjust edge in order to activate this function.
− Click on each edge number on screen. Each element density corresponds to Figure 10.
− Click mesh button again to accept this mesh.
− Click return button.
Note: The mesh on surface id 6 and 7 is assigned to component bottom, and the elements on
surface id 4 are assigned to component middle, the same as components of their
associate surfaces.
Figure 10
To remesh the meshed surfaces:
1. Remesh the meshed surfaces with new parameters.

− Toggle the interactive sub-panel.
− Click on surfs box, and select surface id 4,6, and 7.
− Click on remesh button.
− Change the node density as shown in Figure 11.
− Click on biasing button.
− Enter 0.00 in the number field next to the biasing intensity = .
− Click set all button.
− Click on mesh.
− Click on return to accept the new mesh.

2. Delete elements using the remesh button.
− Select the interactive subpanel.
− Click on surfs box, and select surface id 4,6, and 7.
− Click on remesh button.
− Click on return button. Now the elements on these three surfaces will all be deleted. This is
an alternative way to delete elements without leaving the automesh panel.
Figure 11
Cleanup Surfaces and Add Fixed Points

This exercise demonstrates the usage of the cleanup, add points, and remove points sub-panels
while automeshing a model. The addition of these functions in automesh panel allows you to clean
up surfaces without leaving the automesh panel. The mesh is done by setting the reset meshing
prarmeters to: to element size with specified element type.
To remove pinholes on selected surfaces:
1 Retrieve the Cleaned_Up-Geom.hm31 file.

− Click hm file and file = Cleaned_Up-Geom.hm31.

− Enter the numbers panel in page Tool.
− Select all surfaces.
3. Enter options panel located in the permanent menu.
− Go to modeling subpanel.
− Click on cleanup tol = button and type 0.2 in the number field.
− Click return to exit the panel.
4. Enter in the global panel located in the permanent menu.
− Click on element size button, and enter 2.0 in the number field.
− Click return to exit the panel.
5. Go to automesh/cleanup subpanel in page 2D.
6. Select the line button below the unsplit surf: function.
7. Select the edges of pinholes located on surface id 1 and in the middle of surface id 3. The
selected pinhole and the trim lines will be removed (see Figure 12).
8. Click P to refresh the screen.
Figure 12

To suppress/unsuppress a surface edge:
1. While still in the automesh/cleanup subpanel, select the line button below the toggle box. The
cleanup tolerance of 0.2 should be automatically displayed in the field next to cleanup tol =.
2. Click on the green shared edge between surface id 6 and 7.
3. Click P (keyboard) to refresh the screen.
To set up meshing environment:
1. Click on create mesh subpanel

2. Enter the interactive subpanel and select the surfs.
3. Switch elements to current comp to elements to surface’s comp.
Note: The element size should already be set to 2.0 due to the change of the global element
size setting in the previous step.
To add fixed points and mesh surface id 5 and 8:
1. Click the radio button next to add points subpanel.

2. Select surface id 5, and set the switch to points.
− Click the yellow points button to bring up the extended entities menu.
− Click by collector button.
− Select the component Points.
− Click select button to complete the selection and exit the window selection menu.
− The seven points (x’s) offset from surface id 5 will be highlighted.
− A value of 0.2 should be displayed in the number field next to cleanup tol=.
− Click add to create fixed points (o’s) on surface id 5.
Note: Fixed points are now associated with the middle component.
3. Enter the interactive subpanel and select the surface id 5 and 8.

4. Click mesh button.
5. Click mesh button again to create elements.
Note: Observe the mesh on surfaces id 5 and how the fixed points affect the placement of
the nodes. When you import this model, you have some free points in the points
collector. Free points (with graphical symbol X’s ) don’t affect your meshing. After you
change those points from free points to fixed points, HyperMesh will be forced to put
nodes on those fixed points later when you mesh your model.
6. Click on abort to abort the mesh.

To trim the selected surfaces:
1. Enter the cleanup subpanel and click on the top node box below split surf option.
2. To choose the first node, move the cursor to the shared edge between surface id 3 and 2 and
click on the middle of the edge. A node will be created at that location.
Note: A node can be created simply by clicking anywhere along the edge. You don’t have to
highlight the edge or wait until the cursor becoming a box.
3. Once the first node is selected, the lower node box is highlighted automatically. Click on the
vertex on the opposite side of the surface id 3. As shown in Figure 13, a line connecting these
two nodes is used to trim the surface id 3 at the normal direction.
4. Repeat step 1 – 3 to trim surface id 2 and surface id 1 as shown in Figure 13.
Note: Trimming surfaces allow you to split surfaces and generate shared edges in between.
Later while meshing surfaces, you will have more nodes on shared edges. Which gives
you more control over your mesh.
Figure 13
To display all the surface Ids again:

− Select all.
To add fixed points to a selected edge:
1. Select the add points subpanel.

2. Select surface id 2, and switch to node list.
3. Add fixed point along the edge between surface id 2 and 3:
- While node list is still highlighted, click and hold the left mouse button.
- While holding the left mouse button, move it to the edge between surface id 2 and 3.

- Wait until the edge is highlighted and the cursor changes from + to square symbol, click with
right mouse button to assign a fixed point.
4. Repeat step 1-3 to add fixed points along the edge between surface id 9 and 10.
Note: These two nodes should be placed so they break the edge into sections similar to the
nearby edges (see Figure 14).
Figure 14
To mesh the remaining surfaces:
1. Enter the create mesh subpanel,

2. Highlight surface , choose all from the sub window.
3. Using the densities indicated in Figure 14, click mesh to review and return to accept. The
complete model is displayed in Figure 15.
4. Click Return to exit the automesh panel.
To use the element quality checks available in HM:
1. Enter the check elements panel located at page Tool.

2. Left click in the 2-d radio button to make it the active subpanel.
3. Click the assign plot check box, and then jacobian to graphically review the element quality.
4. Repeat for any other element quality check desired.
5. Select return to enter the main menu.

Figure 15
Refine Element Quality By Remeshing Elements

This exercise tells you how to refine your mesh by remeshing elements in automesh panel.
Users can select a group of existing elements with poor quality and remesh the elements
again. HyperMesh automatically chooses different meshing algorithm to perform meshing.
To initialize and cleanup working environment:

1. Close any current working HyperMesh sessions by clicking red quit panel
2. Search a file called “hmmenu.set in your current working directory, and delete it if you
find it.
3. Restart a new HyperMesh session
Note: The hmmenu.set file is a binary file that Hypermesh updates when you exit Hypermesh.
Your personal hmmenu.set file stores many global parameters and previous meshing
seeds. It is located in the directory from which you started Hypermesh. If the file already
existd, it is overwritten after you run a new session. The most recent global parameter
values in the current Hypermesh session are written to this file when you exit. The next
time you start Hypermesh, it has the values recorded in the hmmenu.set file. If the file
does not exist when Hypermesh is invoked, the global parameter values are default
values.

To retrieve the Cleaned_Up_Geom.hm31 file and display surf ids:
1. Retrieve the Clean_Up_Geom.hm31 file.

− Click hm file and file = cleaned_up_geom.hm31
− Select all.
To delete unnecessary holes:
1. While still in the automesh/cleanup subpanel, select the line button below the toggle box.
3. Click on the edges of 4 red circles in surface id 3 and 1 to delete 4 pine holes.
4. Click P (keyboard) to refresh the screen.
To trim the selected surfaces:
1. Enter the cleanup subpanel and click on the top node box below split surf option.
2. To choose the first node, move the cursor to the shared edge between surface id 3 and 2 and
click on the middle of the edge. A node will be created at that location.
Note: A node can be created simply by clicking anywhere along the edge. You don’t have to
highlight the edge or wait until the cursor becoming a box.
3. Once the first node is selected, the lower node box is highlighted automatically. Click on the
vertex on the opposite side of the surface id 3. As shown in Figure 16, a line connecting these
two nodes is used to trim the surface id 3 at the normal direction.
4. Repeat step 1 – 3 to trim surface id 2 and surface id 1 as shown in Figure 16.
Note: Trimming surfaces allow you to split surfaces and generate shared edges in between.
Later while meshing surfaces, you will have more nodes on shared edges. Which gives
you more control over your mesh.

Figure 16
To start meshing the model:

1. Click the Automesh panel in 2D page.
2. Enter the automesh panel and go to the create mesh sub-panel. Make sure the toggle remains in
interactive.
3. Activate the small check in front of reset meshing parameters to: Enter element size= 2.0.
This allows HyperMesh to overwrite global element size setting and use local meshing element
size 2.0. The element type is kept as the default setting, quad.
4. Switch from elements to current comp to elements to surface’s comp.
5. Click on yellow surfs panel. Select all in pop-up window, and all surfaces on screen are
highlighted.
6. Click on mesh panel and go into the meshing module.
7. Change the meshing seeds and choose densities as Figure 17.
8. Click on mesh panel again and create elements.
9. Select checks in the meshing module. Review the quality of the mesh.
10. Click return and return to automesh panel.

Figure 17
To refine meshing quality by remeshing elements:
− Enter the automesh panel and go to the create mesh sub-panel. Make sure the toggle
remains in interactive.
− Change the yellow surfs panel to elems.
− Select elements with poor quality on surface 8 (refer to Figure 18 ). Selected elements are
highlighted as white color.
− Click on green remesh panel. Notice that you enter the meshing module and selected
elements are remeshed.
− Click on abort to abort this remesh.
Note: In the meshing module, notice that Hypermesh puts element density in the middle of the
meshed area. This restricts the nodal location of the remeshed area (refer to Figure 19 ).

Figure 18
Figure 19

To improve the feature angle of the meshed feature recognition:
− Click on blue permanent options panel.

− Choose modeling subselection in options panel.
− Click on feature angle panel, and change feature angle from default (30 ) to 50 .
− Click return and go back to automesh panel.
To refine meshing quality by remeshing elements:
− Remain in create mesh subpanel. Make sure the toggle remains in interactive.
− Make sure the yellow panel remain in elems.
− Select elements with poor quality on surface 8 (refer to Figure 18). Selected elements are
highlighted as white color.
− Click on the green remesh panel. Notice that you entered the meshing module and selected
elements to be remeshed.
Note: Compare the difference between before and after changing the feature angle in the
options panel. Notice that after increasing the feature angle, Hypermesh no longer puts
element density in the middle of the meshed area.
− Click on adjust edge panel , and move the cursor to the bottom edge of surface 8. Change
element density to 8 which is the same as the upper edge between surface 8 and surface 5.
− Click one mesh panel to generate elements.
− Click return to go back to the automesh panel.
− Click return again to accept this mesh.
Note: You can practice remeshing elements to refine other elements that you are not satisfied
with.
Figure 20

Automesh/Remesh - HM-136
This tutorial demonstrates how to remesh elements using the automesh panel and create mesh
subpanel. In HyperMesh 4.0, you can remesh elements when no geometry exists.

• Remesh Elements
• Meshing the Surfaces
• Remesh the Elements
Remesh elements
In HyperMesh 4.0, the interactive and automatic subpanels are replaced by the create mesh
subpanel. This subpanel has the interactive and automatic options. Interactive is the default
option. In the create mesh subpanel, select the surfaces to mesh or remesh, or select the elements
to remesh.
Elements are remeshed with the use of the HyperMesh inferred surface algorithm. Geometry for the
selected elements does not need to exist in the model. The inferred surface algorithm creates
geometry data from the selected elements in order to create new mesh.
When elements are selected to be remeshed, there is the break connectivity option and the vertex
angle parameter. The break connectivity option detaches the node connectivity between adjacent
selected and unselected elements. This allows you to adjust the node densities along the boundary
of the selected elements. The vertex angle parameter defines the placement of vertices along the
boundary of the selected elements. If the angle between two adjacent element edges along the
boundary is less the specified angle, a vertice is placed at the meeting point of the two edges.
In HyperMesh 4.0, the mixed (quads and trias) meshing algorithm can be used on mapped and
unmapped surfaces. The mixed meshing algorithm generates a quad dominant mesh where all
transitions between opposing mesh densities are accomplished using tria elements. This produces
mesh patterns that are more regular in appearance.
Figure 1 - The automesh panel

Meshing the Surfaces
To retrieve the file for this tutorial:
1. Select the files panel on any main menu page.

3. Double-click file =.
HyperMesh displays a list of the files and subdirectories in the current directory. Directory names
are followed by a slash.
4. Select the remesh.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under <altair
home>/altair/tutorials/hm/.
5. HyperMesh returns to the files panel. Note that file = now displays the location of the
remesh.hm file.
6. Click retrieve.
7. Click return to access the main menu.
Figure 2 - The remesh.hm file
Rotate the model and notice the contours of the surfaces.

To mesh the surfaces:
1. Select the automesh panel on the 2-D page.

2. Select the create mesh subpanel.
3. Click surfs and select displayed.
4. Click the box preceding reset mesh parameters to: to make this option active.
5. In the element size = field, enter 12.
6. Click the switch next to quads and select mixed.
7. Click mesh.
8. Click mesh again to preview the mesh.
9. Click return.
Figure 3 - Surfaces selected and meshed
To check the mesh quality:
1. Select the checks subpanel.

2. Click jacobian.
Minimum jacobian is 0.45.
3. Click warpage.
Maximum warpage found is 1.33.
4. Click aspect.

Maximum aspect ratio is 4.09.
5. Click skew.
Maximum skew angle is 63.36.
6. Click return to accept the mesh and return to the automesh panel / create mesh subpanel.
Remesh the Elements
To remesh some elements to improve jacobian:
1. Click the input collector switch select elems.

2. Click elems and select by window.
3. Select the elements as shown in Figure 4.
4. Click remesh.
5. Click mesh to preview the mesh.
7. Click jacobian.
8. Click return to accept the mesh and go back to the automesh panel / create mesh subpanel.
Figure 4 - Elements selected to be remeshed

Figure 5 - Selected elements remeshed
To remesh some other elements to improve jacobian:
1. Click elems and select by window.

2. Select the elements as shown in the Figure 6.
3. Click remesh.
4. Click mesh to preview the mesh.
5. Click f next to local view to fit the area being meshed to the graphics area.
6. Select the biasing subpanel.
7. Click adjust edge.
8. Right click multiple times on the 0.000 on the lowest boundary edge to change the value to –
2.400.
9. Click mesh.
11. Click jacobian.
12. Click return to accept the mesh and go back to the automesh panel / create mesh subpanel.

Figure 6 - Elements selected to be remeshed
Figure 7 - Selected elements remeshed

Automesh/Proj to Edge subpanel - HM-137
The automesh/proj to edge subpanel is used to project fixed point interiors of a surface to the
surface’s edge or to multiple surfaces. As a result, when the surface is meshed, the mesh pattern will
look more regular than before. An example of this functionality would be a surface with interior fixed
points that specify weld point locations.
The following exercise is included:

• Using the Automesh/Proj to Edge subpanel
Using the Automesh/Proj to Edge subpanel
1. Select files on the main menu.

2. Click file = twice.
3. Select the file projectedge.hm in the <altair home>/altair/tutorials/hm/ directory.
4. Click retrieve.
5. Click return.
Figure 1 – Proj to Edge

To mesh a surface containing interior fixed points without using the proj to edge subpanel:
1. Select automesh on the 2D page.

5. Click create mesh.
6. Select the yellow, slender, rectangular surface.
7. Click the box before reset meshing parameters to:
8. Enter 20 in the field following elem size =.
9. Click the switch below elem size = and select quads.
10. Click mesh.
12. Click abort to return to the automesh panel and to not accept the mesh.
Figure 2 - Surface meshed without using the automesh / proj to edge subpanel.

To project the surface's interior fixed points to its edges:
Note: There are three options to do this: a) The fixed points can be projected to its edges; b)
The fixed points can be projected onto its surfaces; c) The fixed points can be projected
to multiple surfaces by changing the tolerance values.
1. Click proj to edge.

3. Enter 20 in the field following distance tolerance =.
4. Enter 25 in the field following angle tolerance =.
5. Click project.
Note: The distance tolerance and angle tolerance parameters control the creation of fixed
points. If the shortest distance between an edge and an interior fixed point is less then or
equal to the distance tolerance, a fixed point will be created on the edge. If the angle
ABC, formed by an existing fixed point edge (A), the fixed point to-be-created (B) and the
interior fixed point (C), is greater than the angle tolerance, a fixed point will not be
created.
Figure 3 - Interior surface fixed points projected to surface's edges.

To mesh the surface:
1. Click create mesh.

3. Click mesh.
5. Click return to accept the mesh.
Figure 4 - Surface meshed after using the automesh / proj to edge subpanel.
Defeature
The defeature panel, located on the Geom page, provides tools to help remove unwanted features in
geometry, e.g. edge and surface fillets, holes etc. The tools remove features and create any
necessary filler surfaces as a substitution.
• Remove trim lines
• Remove Pin Holes
• Remove surface fillets and make sharp corners using the parameters specified
• Remove edge/line fillets using the specified parameters
• Trim-Intersect to remove edge fillets by selecting two points of tangency around the fillet

Remove Trim Lines
Remove trim lines can be used to retrive the original surfaces from which the current surfaces were
trimmed. It can also be used to remove the interior trim lines of a surface. Interior trim lines are any
free edges that are entirely contained within a surface’s boundary.
In this example, we will remove the interior trim lines by specifying one of the lines:
1. Retrieve the HM database file defeature.hm.

2. Go to the defeature panel on the Geom page.
3. Select trim lines subpanel.
4. Click the toggle below remove and select interior trim lines.
5. Click lines and select one of the interior trim lines defining one of the small rectanglular cut outs
on the top center surface. Alternately, click in the lines box and select displayed from the
extended selection menu.
6. Click untrim to remove the interior trim lines.
Note: The other option under remove is to remove all trim lines. This function allows you to
specify a surface and will return the original, untrimmed surface information. Depending
on the CAD package and method used to create these surfaces, the results of this
operation will vary.
Surface Fillets
This function can be used to remove surface fillets, or fillets between two non-coplanar surfaces. The
rounded fillet surface will be replaced by a planar, tangential extention of the adjacent surfaces.
Fillets may be specified by selecting the fillet profile as a line, or by specifying a surface and range of
fillet radii.
To search the surface fillets by min/max radius:

2. Select the surf fillets subpanel.
3. Select the toggle for surfaces to search: and select surfs.
4. Click in the surfs box and select displayed.
5. Set the fillet params as follows: Min radius = 5.0; Max radius = 15.000
6. Click find fillets.

Figure 1: Use the radius parameters of an example fillet profile to identify surface fillets.
Note: At this point, a new subpanel appears where you can be specific about selecting the fillet
to be removed, fillet ends and edge associativity. Ignore edge association can be used
to verify or modify the selection of edges whose adjacent surface geometry will be
ignored in favor of using the selected fillet surface’s geometry when calculating the
tangent surface. This is commonly used if the adjacent surface has a very high degree of
curvature compared to the fillet, or if the edge in question is a free edge. Fillet ends can
be used to verify or modify fillet ends. Unless a string of fillets makes a complete loop and
closes upon itself, you should see at least two fillet end lines.
7. Click remove to delete the rounded fillet surfaces and replace them with an intersecting, planar
surface tangent to the fillet surface edge.

Figure2: After removing surface fillets, adjacent surfaces are extended along the tangent until they intersect.
Edge Fillets
This option can be used to remove any edge fillets on a free surface edge. HyperMesh can identify
these fillets given a range of fillet radii and a minimum arc angle. Using these filtering options, you
can find the fillets in your model and then remove them.
To remove fillets:
2. Go to geom page and defeature panel.

3. Go to edge fillets subpanel.
4. Click on surfs and select the end surface in the extreme +X and –Z direction of the model. Set
the radius and angle values as follows: Min radius = 5.0; Max radius = 15.000; Min angle =
15.000.
5. Click find. The fillets will be identified with a blue F and lines indicating the beginning and ending
points of tangency of the fillets.
6. Select both of the fillets to be removed. Alternately, click the fillets button and select all from the
pop up list.
7. Click remove to eliminate the fillets by projecting the surface edges from the point of tangency
until they intersect.

Figure 3: Use the edge fillet function to identify and remove rounded corners on free-surface edges.
Trim-Intersect
The trim intersect function works like the edge fillet function, except the points of tangency are
specified by clicking on the free-surface edge.
To trim points:
1. Rotate the model to center the view to the end surface in the most –X and –Z direction.
2. Select the trim-intersect subpanel.
st
3. With the blue box highlighting node under 1 edge trim location:, select the trim point (point of
tangency) for one of the edge fillets, as shown in the figure below.

Figure 4: Click on points of tangency of the edge fillets to square off rounded corners on free-surface edges.
4. Select the second point of tangence for this edge fillet.

Note: In this panel, HM is expecting a point to be defined on a surface edge. A temporary node
will be created. After selecting the second point, the trimming and de-filleting operation
will occur.
5. Repeat these steps for the remaining free-edge fillets.

Note: Using a size 10 quad plate element, compare the resulting mesh for the defeatured
model to the original model.

7. Go to the automesh panel on the 2-D page.
8. In the create mesh subpanel, click the surfs box and select all.
9. Click the toggle next to interactive and select the automatic mode.
10. Click mesh to generate the mesh.

Figure 5: Size 10 quad plate mesh after defeaturing the part.
Figure 6: Size 10 quad plate mesh without defeaturing the part.
Note: In these excersises, we used the functions in the defeature panel to simplify the
geometry of a small part. The remove trim lines function was used to eliminate two
rectangular cut outs on the top surface. The surface fillet function was used to remove
the curved fillets where the top surface transitioned to the sides. Edge fillet and Trim-
intersect were used to square off the end surfaces. The results of these operations will
yield a more regular, geometric mesh.

Automeshing Tria Transition Features - HM-140
In this tutorial, create 2-D finite elements to demonstrate the mesh quality produced using the options
on the mesh params subpanel and automeshing module
Perform the exercises in the following order:

• Using the Quads Mapped Mesh Element Type and the Smoothing Controls
• Using the Mixed Mapped Mesh Element Type and the Smoothing Controls
administrator.
Using the Quads Mapped Mesh Element Type and the

Smoothing Controls

4. Select the tria_trans.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under
/tutorials/hm/.
tria_trans.hm file.
6. Click retrieve.
To display the surface IDs:
1. Select the numbers panel on the Tools page.

3. Click surfs and select all from the extended entity selection menu.
4. Click display

To select the collector type:
1. Select the global panel on the permanent menu.

2. Click component = and select quads_size_only.
3. Click return to exit the global panel.
4. Click return to exit the numbers panel.
To set the mesh parameters:

2. Select the mesh params subpanel.
3. Click the leftmost toggle and select use size and biasing.
4. Click elem size = and enter 1.000.
5. Click the switch under mapped mesh elem type and select quads.
6. Activate size control and deactivate skew control, if necessary.
To mesh the surface and create elements:
1. Select the interactive subpanel.

3. Click mesh.
4. Review the densities and click mesh to preview the elements.
5. Click return.
Note that some of the elements may need to be modified.
• Repeat the steps using the quads_skew_only component and the skew option activated.
• Repeat the steps using the quads_size_skew component and the skew and size options
activated.
• Compare the elements created with each of the options:

Quads Size Only
Quads Skew Only

Quads Size and Skew
See Also
Using the Mixed Mapped Mesh Element Type and the Smoothing Controls
Using the Mixed Mapped Mesh Element Type and the

Smoothing Controls
To set the collector type:

2. Click component = and select mixed_size_only.
3. Click return to exit the global panel.
To set the mesh parameters:
1. Select the automesh panel on the 2-D or 3-D page.

3. Click the leftmost toggle and select use size and biasing.
5. Click the switch under mapped mesh elem type and select mixed.
6. Activate size control and deactivate skew control, if necessary.

To mesh the surface and create elements:
1. Select the interactive subpanel.

3. Click mesh.
4. Review the densities and click mesh to preview the elements.
5. Click return.
Note that some of the elements may need to be modified.
• Repeat the steps using the mixed_skew_only component and the skew option activated.
• Repeat the steps using the mixed_size_skew component and the skew and size options
activated.
• Compare the elements created with each of the options:
Mixed Size Only

Mixed Skew Only
Mixed Size and Skew

Chordal Deviation Meshing - HM-141
This tutorial explains the effects of the chordal deviation parameters in the automesh panel. Chordal
deviation is a meshing algorithm that allows HyperMesh to automatically vary node densities and
biasing along curved surface edges to gain a more accurate representation of the surface being
meshed.
Since each procedure builds on the preceding section, you should start with the first exercise and
continue doing the exercises in the following order:
• The Chordal Deviation Options
• Creating a Mesh Based Only on Element Size
• The Maximum Deviation Parameter
• The Maximum Angle Parameter
• The Maximum Element Size Parameter
administrator.
See Also
Automeshing Module - HM-135L
The Chordal Deviation Options

The chordal deviation options are located on the mesh params subpanel of the automesh panel. By
default, meshing a surface from the interactive and automatic subpanels ignores all settings in the
mesh params subpanel. To include the mesh parameter settings, set the element size = toggle to
use mesh params in the interactive or automatic subpanels of the automesh panel.
The mesh params subpanel is divided into two halves. The left half contains the options for chordal
deviation meshing. The right half contains options for the tria transition meshing algorithm described
in tutorial HM-140-L.
use size and biasing / use chordal deviation Used to activate or deactivate chordal
toggle deviation meshing.
use size and biasing arranges the nodes that

lie on the surface edges equidistant from each
other and at a spacing approximately equal to
the specified element size.
use chordal deviation automatically adjusts

the surface edge densities and biasing values
based on the specified chordal deviation
criteria discussed below.
For more information on using the automesh

panel with the use size and biasing option,
please see tutorial HM-135-L
min elem size and max elem size Controls the nodal densities along surface
edges.
The largest distance between two nodes is the

max elem size.
The smallest distance between two nodes is

the min elem size.
The element size parameters take

precedence over all other chordal deviation
parameters.
max deviation Defines the maximum allowable distance

between an edge of the surface being meshed
and an element edge.
max angle Defines the maximum allowable angle

between two element edges.
The chordal deviation parameters are also available in the density subpanel of the automeshing
module.
See Also
Creating a Mesh Based Only on Element Size

Creating a Mesh Based Only on Element Size
In this tutorial, create a mesh using only element size, not the chordal deviation meshing parameters.
Compare the mesh created in this tutorial with those created in the following tutorials, which use the
chordal deviation mesh parameters:
• The Maximum Deviation Parameter
• The Maximum Angle Parameter
• The Maximum Element Size Parameter

4. Select the chordal_dev.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under
/tutorials/hm/.
chordal_dev.hm file.
6. Click retrieve.
To set the mesh parameters and create the mesh:

2. Select the automatic subpanel.
3. Activate reset meshing parameters to:.
5. Click the lowest toggle and select elements to surface’s comp.
6. Click surfs and select by collector from the extended entity selection menu.
HyperMesh goes to the display panel.
7. Select use size from the component list.
8. Click select.
9. Click mesh to create the mesh.
10. Click return.

View of the completed mesh for this exercise.
See Also
The Maximum Deviation Parameter
The Maximum Deviation Parameter

In this tutorial, mesh a set of surfaces using the maximum deviation parameter to control the element
densities and biasing.
To set the chordal deviation parameters:

2. Click the upper toggle and select use mesh params.
HyperMesh now uses the settings in the mesh params subpanel.
4. Click the leftmost toggle and select use chordal deviation.
5. Click min elem size = and enter 1.000.
Note: You can cycle through the parameter settings by pressing the TAB key after typing in a
value.
6. Set max elem size = to 15.000.

7. Set max deviation = to 0.500.
8. Set max angle = to 90.000 for the maximum angle parameter to be neglected.
To create the mesh:


3. Select deviation ctrl from the component list.
4. Click select.
6. Click return to access the automesh subpanel.
See Also
The Maximum Angle Parameter
The Maximum Angle Parameter

In this tutorial, use the same chordal deviation settings from the previous tutorial, but reduce the
maximum angle parameter to compare the effects.

3. Click min elem size = and enter 1.000
Note: You can cycle through the parameter settings by

pressing the TAB key after typing in a value.
4. Set max elem size = to 15.000

5. Set max deviation = to 0.500
6. Set max angle = to 20.000

To create the mesh:

3. Select angle ctrl from the component list.
4. Click select.
See Also
The Maximum Element Size Parameter
The Maximum Element Size Parameter

In this tutorial, use the same chordal deviation parameters from the previous exercise except for the
maximum element size parameter. The maximum element size parameter is increased to allow the
algorithm to create larger and fewer elements along planer and less curved surface edges.

3. Click min elem size = and enter 1.000.
Note: You can cycle through the parameter settings by

pressing the TAB key after typing in a value.
4. Set max elem size = to 30.000.

5. Set max deviation = to 0.500.
6. Set max angle = to 20.000.

To create the mesh:

3. Select max size ctrl from the component list.
4. Click select.

Connecting Components - HM - 200
This tutorial demonstrates how to connect components using the following panels:
rigids panel Create single and multi-node MPC’s
welds panel Create weld elements
rbe3 panel Create RBE3’s
springs panel Define and create springs
equations panel Constrain a model using equations
• Using rigids and rigidlinks to join elements and components
• Using welds to join element and components
• Using RBE3s and spring elements to model a rubber grommet
• Using equations to simulate a basic contact constraint between components
administrator.
Using Rigids and Rigidlinks

In this tutorial, use rigids and rigidlinks to join elements and components.
The rigids menu panel allows you to create rigid or rigid link elements. A rigid element is an element
created in a space between two nodes of a model where a rigid connection is desired.
Rigid elements are displayed as a line between two nodes with the letter R written at the centroid of
the element.
Rigid link elements are displayed as lines between the independent node and the dependent node(s)
with RL displayed at the independent node of the element.
Rigids can translate to RBE2 in NASTRAN or *MPC in ABAQUS.


4. Select the connect1.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under
/tutorials/hm/.
connect1.hm file.
6. Click retrieve.
To create nodes at the center of the holes in parts 1 and 2:
1. Select distance panel on the Geom page.

2. Select the three nodes subpanel.
3. Select any three nodes (N1/N2/N3) on the perimeter of the large hole in part 1.
4. Click circle center.
A circle is created in the center of the three nodes you selected on part 1.
5. Select any three nodes (N1/N2/N3) on the perimeter of the large hole in part 2.
6. Click circle center.
A circle is created in the center of the three nodes you selected on part 2.
7. Select any three nodes (N1/N2/N3) on the perimeter of the small hole in component A.
8. Click circle center
A circle is created in the center of the three nodes you selected on component A.
9. Select any three nodes (N1/N2/N3) on the perimeter of the small hole in component B.
10. Click circle center
A circle is created in the center of the three nodes you selected on component B.
To change the current component to rigids:

2. Click component = and select rigids.
3. Click return.
To create rigidlinks at the large holes:
1. Select the rigids panel on the 1-D page.

3. Click the switch next to dependent: and select multiple nodes.
4. Pick a node at the center of the large hole on part 1 to be the independent node:.
5. Pick nodes on the perimeter of the hole on part 1 to be the dependent node.

6. Click create
7. Pick a node at the center of the large hole on part 2 to be the independent node:.
8. Pick nodes on the perimeter of the hole on part 2 to be the dependent node.
9. Click create
You model should look like the figure below.
To create a node at the mid-point between the two rigidlinks:
1. Select the distance panel on the Tool page.

2. Select the two nodes subpanel.
3. Select two nodes (N1/N2) at the center of each rigid link.
4. Click nodes between = and enter 1.
5. Click nodes between to create the mid-point node.
6. Click return.

To join the rigidlinks with two rigid elements:
1. Select the rigids panel on the1-D page.

3. Click the switch next to dependent: and select single node.
4. Pick the mid-point node created in the previous exercise to be the independent: node:.
5. Pick a node at the center of one of the rigid links on part 1 to be the dependent node.
6. Repeat steps 4 & 5 for the mid-point node and the other rigid link.
Using Welds
In this tutorial, use welds to join elements and components.
The welds panel allows you to create normally aligned rigid elements between two plate elements.
Place weld elements between the sections of your model that are to be welded.
Weld elements are displayed as a line between two nodes with the letter W written at the centroid of
the element.
Welds can translate to RBAR in NASTRAN or *mpc in ABAQUS.


/tutorials/hm/.
connect2.hm file.
6. Click retrieve.
To change the current component to welds:

2. Click component = and select welds.
3. Click return.
To create spot welds joining part1 and part2:
1. Select the spotwelds panel on the 1-D page.

2. Select the using nodes subpanel.
3. Click the toggle and select without systems.
4. Deactivate move node.
5. Pick the node on component A and the adjacent node on part 1.
6. Pick the node on component B and the adjacent node on part 2.
7. Click return.

Using RBE3s
In this tutorial, use RBE3s to join elements and components.
The rbe3 panel allows you to create, review, and update RBE3 elements. The update subpanel
allows you to edit the connectivity, dofs, and weight for each node of the element.
RBE3 elements are displayed as lines between the dependent node and the independent node(s)
with RBE3 displayed at the dependent node of the element.
RBE3’s define the motion at a reference grid point -the dependent node- as the weighted average of
the motions at a set of other grid points -the independent nodes. RBE3 is used in NASTRAN.

/tutorials/hm/.
connect3.hm file.

6. Click retrieve.
To change the current component to rigids:

2. Click component = and select rigids.
3. Click return.
To create RBE3’s at the small holes:
1. Select the rbe3 panel on the 1-D page.

3. Pick a node at the center of the small hole on component A to be the dependent node.
4. Pick nodes on the perimeter of component A to be the independent nodes.
5. Click create.
6. Pick a node at the center of the small hole on component B to be the dependent node.
7. Pick nodes on the perimeter of component B to be the independent nodes.
8. Click create.
9. Click return.

Using Springs
In this tutorial, use springs to join elements and components.
The springs panel allows you to create spring elements. A spring element is an element created in a
space between two nodes of a model where a spring connection is desired. Spring elements store a
property and a degree of freedom (dof).
Spring elements are displayed as a line between two nodes with the letter K written at the centroid of
the element.
Springs can translate to CELAS2 in NASTRAN or *spring in ABAQUS. Springs require a property
definition.

/tutorials/hm/.
connect4.hm file.
6. Click retrieve.
To select the NASTRAN analysis template:

2. Click template file = twice.
3. Select the nastran/ directory.
4. Select general.
5. Click return.
To change the current component to springs:

2. Click component = and select springs.
3. Click return.

To create a spring property definition:
1. Select the collectors panel on any main menu page.

3. Click the switch after collector type: and select props.
4. Click name = and enter k1.
5. Click card image = and select PELAS.
HyperMesh goes to the card image subpanel.
This allows you to enter the NASTRAN card data.
7. Click the data entry field under K1 and enter 1.0 as the spring constant.
8. Click return twice to access to the main menu.
To create a spring element joining the RBE3’s:
1. Select the springs panel on the 1-D page.

2. Click property = and select k1.
3. Select dof2.
4. Click the toggle and select no vector.
The other options are off by default.
5. Pick a node at the center of one of the RBE3 elements.
6. Pick a node at the center of the other RBE3 element.
The spring element is created and represented by a “CELAS1.
7. Click return.

Using Equations
In this tutorial, use equations to simulate a basic contact constraint between components.
The equations panel allows you to create, review, and update equations.
Equations are displayed as lines between the dependent node and the independent node(s) with the
letters EQ displayed at the dependent node of the equation.
Equations are used in NASTRAN as MPC or in ABAQUS as *equation.
Place an equation in a load collector.

/tutorials/hm/.
connect5.hm file.
6. Click retrieve.
To create a load collector:

3. Click the switch after collector type: and select loadcols.
4. Click name = and enter the name equations.

6. Click create.
The collector was created.
To set up the constraint equations:
1. Select the equations panel on the BCs page.

3. Click the switch and select dof2 as the dependent node degree of freedom.

4. Activate dof2 as the independent node degree of freedom. Deactivate any other degree of
freedom options selected.
5. Ensure w has a value of 1.0.
6. Click constant and enter 0.
To create the constraint equations:
1. Pick a node on the edge of part 1 as the dependent node.

2. Pick the corresponding node on part 2 as the independent node.
3. Click create.
4. Repeat this for all nodes along the edge.

Building 1-D Elements - HM-210
This tutorial demonstrates how to use the Bar, Line mesh and Features functions available on the 1-
D and Tool pages of HyperMesh. These functions allow you to build 1-D elements.
Since each procedure builds on the preceding section, you should start with
the first exercise and continue doing the exercises in the following order:
• Creating a Bar Element
• Creating 1-D Elements Using the Line Mesh Panel
• Creating 1-D Elements Using the Features Panel
administrator.
Creating a Bar Element

This tutorial explains how to create 1-D bar elements using the bars panel. The bars panel allows
you to create, review or update 2-noded and 3-noded bar elements.

4. Select the 1D_elements.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under
/tutorials/hm/.
HyperMesh returns to the files panel. Note that file = now displays the location of the
1D_elements.hm file.
5. Click retrieve.

The 1D_elements.hm file.
To create a bar element:
1. Select the bars panel on the 1-D page.

2. Select the bar2 subpanel.
3. Click ax = and enter the value 0.
4. Click ay = and enter the value 0.
5. Click az = and enter the value 0.
These are the values for the bar offset.
6. Click property = and select property1.
A property is now assigned to the element.
7. Click pins a = and enter the value 0.
8. Click pins b = and enter the value 0.
These are the values for the degrees of freedom.
9. Click the switch below update and select components from the pop-up menu.
10. After x comp =, enter the value 1.
11. After y comp =, enter the value 1.
12. After z comp =, enter the value 1.
The local y axis is now specified.

13. Click node A and select the lower node in the graphics area.
14. Click node B and select the upper node in the graphics area.
The 2 noded bar element is created.
Bar 2 element created.
Creating 1-D Elements Using the Line Mesh Panel

This tutorial explains how to create 1-D elements along a line.
To create 1-D elements along a line:
1. Select the line mesh panel on the 1-D page.

2. Click the upper left switch and select lines from the pop-up menu.
3. Select a line on the model.
4. Click the toggle and select segment is whole line.
5. Click the switch after element config: and select rigid from the pop-up menu.
6. Click mesh.
The secondary panel now appears.
7. Click set segment to highlight the box with the blue input cursor.

8. After elem density =, enter the value 20.
9. Click set all.
10. Click return twice to access the main menu.
Rigids created in the line mesh panel.
Creating 1-D Elements Using the Features Panel

This tutorial explains how to create a 1-D element from the features in the model.
To create a 1-D element from the features in the model:
1. Select the display panel on the permanent menu.

2. Click the toggle and select elems.
3. Click none.
4. Select feature_elements.
Only the elements needed for this exercise are displayed.
6. Select the features panel on the Tool page.
7. Click Comps.
8. Select feature_elements.
9. Click return.

10. After feature angle =, enter the value 30.
11. Select ignore normals.
12. Click the toggle after create: and select plot elements.
13. Click features.
The plot elements are created.
14. Click return.

16. Click the right toggle and select elems.
17. Click none.
18. Select ^feature.
The plot elements in the green ^feature component are displayed.

Spotweld - HM-215
The first part of this tutorial demonstrates three different ways to create spotwelds or 1D elements in
spotweld panel:
• Using geom
• Using nodes
• Using elems
Using geom option creates 1D elements when surface geometry is available. Using nodes option
creates spotwelds or 1D elements between two nodes or two node sets. It is often used to connect
two finite element parts. Using elems options creates spotwelds or 1D elements between two
element sets. Different from using node options, the 1D elements generated in this way are not
necessary keeping the connectivity between two parts.
The second part of this tutorial demonstrates the use of spotweld input translator in conjunction with
spotweld panel.
Using Geom
Using geom subpanel creates 1D element among surface geometry. It is further divided into two
options: surfs-surfs and lines-surfs. The surfs-surfs subpanel is intended to project a number of spot
weld (or any 1D element type) locations defined by either points or nodes onto a large number of
surfaces within the search tolerance of the identified location. When two or more surface
intersections are found for a given location, fixed points are added to the intersected surfaces, nodes
are created at these fixed points, and FE 1D elements are created between nodes. During the
element creation, an option property can be assigned to the 1D elements and an optional set of local
coordinate systems aligned with the 1D element’s axis can be created. The ind surf options allows
you to pick individual surfaces defining the independent and dependent regions.
Figure1
The second option in this subpanel, lines-surfs, has the same functionality as surfs-surfs except the
1D elements are created between a group of lines and a set of surfaces. Two options are given in
choosing the line: lines and line list. When lines option is chosen, each line is treated independently.
This results in elements being located at beginning and end of each line with the remainder of the 1D
elements being spaced evenly along the length of each individual line. If the line list option is chosen,
all of the selected lines are combined head to tail in the order they are selected, and are treated as a
single line. The density/spacing option indicates the number or spacing of 1D elements along the line
or a set distance between the weld elements to be created along the line or lines.

Figure2
Retrieve and prepare the file for this tutorial:

3. Double click file =.
4. Select the spotweld_geom.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under <altair
home>/altair/tutorials/hm/.
spotweld_geom.hm file.
6. Click retrieve.
Figure 3

8 Go to option/modeling subpanel located at permanent menu.
9 Check the box in front of element handle to turn on the element handles.
10 In the cleanup tol = field, enter 0.5.
11 Switch template labels (type) to HM labels (config).
12 Click return to exit option panel.
13 Click geom clean button located at the macro menu to access the geom clean panel.
14 Enter edges/equivalence subpanel, click surfs, choose all, then click equivalence.
15 Click return to access the main menu.
16 Enter files panel.
17 In the files = field, enter spotweld_step1.hm then click save.
18 Click return to access main menu.
Create 1D element using surfs-surfs option:
1. Retrieve spotweld_step1.hm in the file panel.

2. Click geom clean button located at the macro menu to access the geom clean panel.
3. Enter edges/(un)suppress subpanel, click lines, choose all, and click suppress.
4. Click on spotweld panel located at 1D page. The default setting is using geom subpanel with
surfs-surfs option.
5. Click return.
6. Click surfs and select all.
7. Click on the switch under the weld location and choose points.
8. Click on points again to bring up extended entity selection window. Choose points by collector,
select component collector named “Points, and click select.
9. In the search tolerance = field, enter 1.0.
10. Click create. Note each element has its own local coordinate system.

Figure 4
Create 1D element using lines-surfs option:
1. Retrieve spotweld_step1.hm saved earlier in the files panel.

3. Enter spotweld /using geom subpanel. Choose lines-surfs option.
4. Click the switch in front of all surfs to choose ind surfs. Now the user can specify the
independent surfaces and dependent surfaces through this option.
5. Activative the surfs button next to ind surf. Choose the surface belonged to lvl9 component
(blue component) by clicking the surface in the window area.
6. Click the surfs button next to dep:. Choose the upper flange belong to lvl7 component (orange
component) by clicking these four surfaces in the window area.
7. Change to without system by clicking the switch in front of build system.
8. In the space = field, enter 20.
9. In the search tolerance = field, enter 10.
10. Highlight the lines button, choose the middle lines of the upper flange.
11. Click create.
Note: The weld will be created between two ends of each line with weld equally spread along
the line based on the specified spacing. Welds will not be created if the separation
between ind surfs and dep surfs is larger than search tolerance (shown in the left part
of Figure 5).

Figure 5
12. Click reject button.

13. Now change the lines to line list.
14. Select the same lines described in step 10.
15. Click create.
Note: There is no weld created at the connection of these two selected line since HyperMesh
considers these two lines as a single line in this case to create the welds.
Figure 6
1. Click reject button again.

2. Click the toggle in front of spacing to use the density option.
3. In the density = field, enter 10.
4. Change line list to lines option.
5. Select the same lines as step 10.
6. Click create.
Note: 10 welds are created in the long line. Due to the distance between two parts, there are
only 4 welds created in the short line.

Figure 7
Using nodes
This subpanel is used to create 1D elements between nodes. It is further divided into two options:
node-node and nodes-nodes. Node-node option creates one 1D element at a time. Nodes-nodes
option creates multiple 1D elements at a time by specifying the nodes on the independent FE shell
mesh, and a set of possible dependent nodes on the dependent FE shell mesh. This option will find
the best pairing of the independent and dependent nodes within the search tolerance and create 1D
elements between them.
The move dep node option can be activated to move the dependent node and create a 1D element
normal to the surface formed by the elements attached to the independent node. This relocation can
occur either with or without pre-existing geometrical surfaces defining the “dependent surface. With
the move dep node option activated, the remesh dep region option is available to remesh the
dependent region if the quality of mesh is not acceptable.
Figure 8
Retrieve and prepare the file for this tutorial:

4. Select the spotweld_node.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under
<altair home>/altair/tutorials/hm/.
spotweld_node.hm file.

6. Click retrieve.
7. Click view located at permanent menu. Choose right.
Figure 9
Create 1D elements using nodes-nodes option
1. Enter spotweld panel located at 1D page.

2. Click nodes-nodes button.
3. Activate the nodes box next to indep. Click the nodes in the window area as shown in Figure 10.

Figure 10
4. Activate the nodes box next to dep:. Click the nodes box again to bring up the entity selection
window, click by collector, and select the big_flange component collector.
6. Click create. Created welds are shown in Figure 11.
7. Click reject.
8. Check the box in front of move dep nodes option. Note the remesh dep region is available
now.
9. Click create. Created welds are shown in Figure 12.
10. Click reject.
11. Check the box in front of remesh dep region.
12. Click create. The welds created in this option are shown in Figure 13.

Figure 11

Figure 12

Figure 13
Using elems
Using elems supanel is used to create 1D elements between elements. It is intend to connect two or
more finite element models at specific weld locations that are not necessary on the node of the
elements. Therefore the 1D elements created in this way are not necessarily connected to the FE
shell elements. When nodes or points are selected, HyperMesh will first duplicate the selected
nodes or points, project these duplicated nodes or points to the inferred surfaces created by these
two element sets, then create 1D elements between the projected points. The ind elems option
allows you to pick individual elements defining the independent and dependent regions.
Retrieve the file for this exercise:


4. Select the spotweld_elem_new.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under
spotweld_elem_new.hm file.
6. Click retrieve.
Create 1D elements:
1. Enter spotweld/using elems subpanel.

2. Click the switch under the weld location and choose nodes.
3. Select the nodes belonging to component surf1 (blue component).
4. Highlight elems box. Click elems and choose all.
6. Switch build system to without system.

7. Click create.
Four weld elements are created. Note these 1D welds are not connected to the shell elements.
Figure 14

Importing weld data to existing model:
The spotweld data in ASCII format can be imported to HyperMesh through feinput translator. The
supported formats include Element ID, spotweld locaton, Connector part Ids. Each weld location is
stored in HyperMesh as a free point. Based on whether the welds connect two, three, or four parts
(2t, 3t, 4t), different component collectors are generated to store these welds respectively (named
Master weld points_2t, Master weld points_3t, or Master weld point_4t). Once these weld point is
imported to the model, the welds can be generated from spotweld panel.
Retrieve the file for this exercise:

4. Select the spotweld_elem_new.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under
spotweld_elem_new.hm file.
6. Click retrieve.
Import weld data:
1. Go to files / import subpanel.

2. Double click translator =, click next, and choose spotweld.exe.
3. Double click files =, choose spotweld_point.txt.
4. Click import.
5. Click return to access main menu.
6. Click display panel located at permanent menu. A new component, Master Weld points_2t
containing 7 free points is created.
Create welds between sheel elements on the imported welds:
1. Enter spotweld/using elems subpanel located at 1D page.

2. Switch weld location option from nodes to points.
3. Click point, choose by collector, and select component named Master weld points_2t.
4. Highlight elems box. Click elems and choose all.
6. Switch build system to without system.
7. Click create. Note these welds are not connected to the dependent shell elements.

Figure 15
Create welds between surfaces on the imported weld points.
1. In the spotweld panel, click reject.

2. Click F2 function key to delete panel. Delete all the elements.
3. Click Esc key to return to spotweld panel.
4. Choose using geom subpanel and choose surfs-surfs option.
5. Click surfs, choose displayed.
7. Click point, choose by collector, and select component named Master weld points_2t.
8. Click create.
Note the fixed points are created between the welds and the surfaces.

Figure 16

Calculating Beam Cross Section - HM-220
This tutorial demonstrates how to use the beam xsect panel. The beam cross section panel
calculates the cross sectional plane for a beam element and creates a beam element. It allows you
to create a summary file with the results of the calculations performed. The beam cross section
panel has two subpanels, offset lines and pick geom. After you use the pick geom subpanel to
calculate the cross-sectional plane, a secondary panel is displayed. The secondary panel allows you
to apply the results to the previously created HyperMesh property and create the beam element and
summary file. The offset lines subpanel allows you to create welds on the cross section of the
element. The beam cross-section post-processing subpanel allows you to apply the results to the
previously created HyperMesh property solver and create the beam element and a summary file. The
Center of Gravity (purple +) and Shear Center (yellow +) are displayed in the graphics area.
In this tutorial, use the PBEAM card for the Nastran solver as the example to create 2 models; one
with a solid section and another with a shell section. The following procedures are included:
• Creating a property and material collector
• Creating a beam element for a solver
• Creating a summary file to view and save the calculated element properties
• Apply the details to the property card to the beam element
under /tutorials/hm/. The beam_solid.hm file contains line segments and nodes.
administrator.
Note: You must load a template and create material and property collector before you can assign
beam properties. A material collector must also be created to calculate the correct
characteristics for the bar or beam elements for the summary.
See Also
Beam Cross-Section Property Computation Results

Using the Beam Cross Section Panel
Using the Beam Cross Section Panel
To retrieve the beam_solid.hm file:

4. Select the beam_solid.hm file.
5. Click retrieve.
6. Click return.

To load the NASTRAN template in the global template:

2. Double-click template file = and select nastran/general template.
3. Click return.
To set view angles:
1. Click t on the permanent menu.

2. Click thetax = and enter 10.
3. Click thetay = and enter -30.
4. Click thetaz = and enter 1.
5. Click set angles.
6. Click return.
To create a material collector for the nastran PBEAM element:

4. Click name = and enter beam_mat.
8. Click E, click the data entry field under E, and enter 1.
9. Click NU, click the data entry field under NU, and enter 1.
10. Click RHO, click the data entry field under RHO, and enter 1.
11. Click return.
To create a property collector for the beam element:

3. Click the switch after collector type and select props.
4. Click name = and enter beam_prop.
6. Click card image = and select PBEAM .
7. Click material = and select beam_mat.
8. Click create.
9. Click return.

Beam Section Property: Define Section
Creating a Solid Section
To define a section and calculate the cross sectional property for a specified area:
1. Select the beam xsect panel on the 1D page.

2. Select the pick geom subpanel.
3. Click the switch under define using and select lines.
4. Click lines and select displayed.
5. Activate the save elements checkbox.
6. Click the toggle under cross section plane to fit to entities.
7. Click the toggle under plane base node to section centroid.
8. Click the toggle under analysis type to first order.
9. Click solve.

Beam Section Property: Post Process
To assign a FEA solver and update the property card:
1. Click the switch under FEA solver and select nastran/opti-struct.

2. Double-click props.
3. Activate the beam_prop check box.
4. Click select.
5. Click the toggle after prop type to PBEAM.
6. Click update props.
The message, “Property prop1 has a card image loaded for Nastran. Do you wish to clear the
current card image and load a new one? is displayed.
7. Click Yes.
The property called beam_prop has now been updated with the Area, Moment of Inertia, and other
calculated values added to the property card.
To create a bar2 element for the defined cross section:
1. Click the toggle under bar2 element to specify end A and end B.
2. Leave end A at the centroid and click pick node under end B:
3. Pick node 145.
4. Click the toggle under elem orientation to none.

5. Click create elem.
The element is displayed with the label CBAR.
To create a summary file:
1. Click the toggle in the lower left to summary file.

2. Click summary file and enter BEAM_summary.
3. Activate the display check box.
4. Click summary.
The summary information is displayed on the screen. An example of a summary file is shown at
the end of this tutorial.
5. Click the left mouse button to advance to the next page of the summary file.
6. Click return.
To review the card:
1. Click card on the permanent menu.

2. Click the input collector switch and select props.
3. Click props.
4. Activate the beam_prop check box.
5. Click select.
6. Click edit.
The card image is displayed. The values can be edited by clicking in the field you wish to edit and
entering the new values.
7. Click return.
8. Click return.

Beam Section Property: Post Process (with bar element)
To clear this session of HyperMesh:
1. Select the delete panel on the Tool page.

2. Click delete model.
A pop-up window displays the message, “Do you wish to delete the current model?
3. Click Yes.
The HyperMesh session is cleared for the next steps.
4. Click return.

Creating a Thin-walled Section
Offset Geometry for Thin-walled Section
To retrieve the xsect_welds.hm file:

4. Select the xsect_welds.hm file.
5. Click retrieve.
6. Click return.
To define the cross section of an element that has a weld:
1. Select the beam xsect panel on the 1D page.

2. Select the offset lines subpanel.
3. Pick the two yellow lines.
4. Click nominal t = and enter 0.5.
5. Click the toggle next to cross section plane to fit to entities.

6. Click the toggle next to plane base node to section centroid.
7. Click define.
8. Click graphical toggles.

Geographical Toggles for thickness of thin-walled section
Note: You can click the graphical representation of the thickness arrow to toggle the side of
the line where the thickness is to be applied. Each click changes the location of the
thickness of the line from top to bottom or centered. In this case, place the thickness
over the center of the lines.
9. Select the weld pts subpanel.

10. Click lines and pick both yellow lines.
11. Click distance = and enter 1.0.
12. Click diameter = and enter 0.25.
13. Click add weld pt.

14. Pick the leftmost pointer on the top line.
15. Click solve.
The Center of Gravity (purple +) and Shear Center (Yellow +) are displayed.
To assign an FEA solver and update the property card:
1. Click the switch under FEA solver and select nastran.

2. Double-click props.
3. Activate the weld_prop checkbox.
4. Click select.
5. Click the toggle after prop type to PBEAM.
6. Click update props.
The message, “Property prop1 has a card image loaded for Nastran. Do you wish to clear the
current card image and load a new one? is displayed.
7. Click Yes.
The weld_prop property has been updated with the Area, Moment of Inertia, and other
calculated values.
8. Click return.

Create Weld Point
To update the property and view the card in the card previewer:
1. Select card on the permanent menu.

2. Click the input collector switch and select props.
3. Click props.
4. Activate the weld_prop checkbox.
5. Click select.
6. Click edit.
The NASTRAN PBEAM card image is displayed. The values can be edited by clicking the field
you want to edit and entering the desired values.
7. Click return to exit the card panel.
8. Click return to exit the beam xsect panel.

Beam Cross-Section Property Computation Results
Cross-Section Plane Data

• Global base coordinate (0.000000, -1.136364, 0.000000)
• Global normal vector (0.000000, 0.000000, -1.000000)
Area
• A = 220
Centroid
Wrt. User Axes YC = 0
ZC = 0
Wrt. Global Axes global Xc = 0
global Yc = -1.13636
global Zc = 0
Principal Moments of Intertia

• IYYP = 16549.2
• IZZP = 3693.33
Angle Of Principal Bending Axes

• ANGB = 0
Bending
Moments Of Inertia wrt. User Axes IYY = 16549.2
IZZ = 3693.33
IYZ = 0
Moments Of Inertia wrt. Centroid IYYC = 16549.2
IZZC = 3693.33
IYZC = 0
Elastic Section Modulus EMYP = 369.333
EMZP = 1259.8
Plastic Section Modulus PMYP = 680
PMZP = 1715.04

Radius Of Gyration RG = 4.0973
Maximum Coordinate Extension YMAXC = 13.1364
ZMAXC = 10
Shear
Shear Center wrt. Centroid YS = 1.01881
ZS = 0
Wrt. Global Axes Xsc = 0
Ysc = -2.15517
Zsc = 0
Shear Deformation Coefficients AYY = 1.75931
AZZ = 1.84491
AYZ = 0
Principal Shear Coefficients AYYP = 1.75931
AZZP = 1.84491
Angle Of Principal Shear Axes ANGS = 0
Shear Stiffness Factors KYY = 0.568404
KZZ = 0.542033
KYZ = 0
Torsion
Torsional Constant J = 1754.85
Elastic Torsion Modulus EMT = 221.591
Plastic Torsion Modulus PMT = 744.425
Warping Constant wrt. Shear Center GAMMA = 362403
Torsion/Shear Coefficients AXY = 0
AXZ = 0

Results in Terms of NASTRAN Input
$PBAR PID MID Area I1 I2 J NSM
PBAR 1 1 219.999 16549.2 3693.33 1754.84 0.00000
$ C1 C2 D1 D2 E1 E2 F1 F2
0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
$ K1 K2 I12
0.56840 0.54203 0.00000
$ PID MID Area I1 I2 I12 J NSM
PBEAM 1 1 219.999 16549.2 3693.33 0.00000 1754.84 0.00000
$ C1 C2 D1 D2 E1 E2 F1 F2
0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000
$ K1 K2 S1 S2 NSI(A) NSI(B) CW(A) CW(B)
0.56840 0.54203 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 362403. 0.00000
$ M1(A) M2(A) M1(B) M2(B) N1(A) N2(A) N1(B) N2(B)
0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000 -1.0188 0.00000 0.00000 0.00000

Building Surfaces and Shell Meshes - HM-300L
This tutorial demonstrates how to build surfaces and shell meshes using the panels listed below.
These panels are located on the 2-D page.
ruled panel Allows you to create a surface and/or mesh from nodes or lines
that are unconnected.
spline panel Allows you to create a 3-D mesh and/or surface with lines.
skin panel Allows you to create a surface and/or mesh skin across a set of
lines.
drag panel Allows you to create a surface and/or mesh by dragging nodes,
lines, or elements.
line drag panel Allows you to create a surface and/or mesh by dragging nodes,
lines, or elements along a line.

• Creating Surfaces and Meshes Using the ruled panel.
• Creating Surfaces and Meshes Using the spline panel
• Creating Surfaces and Meshes Using the skin panel.
• Dragging Lines to Create Surfaces and/or Shell Meshes
• Dragging Nodes to Create Surfaces and/or Shell Meshes
• Creating Surfaces and/or Shell Meshes with Lines
• Creating Surfaces and/or Shell Meshes with Nodes
administrator.
See Also
See the following panels in the HyperMesh Panels On-line Help for more information:
ruled automesh
spline create nodes
skin lines
drag line edit
line drag reparam (line parameters)

Creating Surfaces and Meshes using the ruled panel
In this tutorial, use the ruled panel to create surfaces and shell meshes from a combination of nodes,
lines, and/or line segments.

4. HyperMesh displays a list of the files and subdirectories in the current directory. Directory names
5. Select the simple300.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under
/tutorials/hm/.
simple300.hm file.
7. Click retrieve.
The simple300.hm file

To build a ruled surface using lines:
1. Select the ruled panel on the 2-D page.

2. Click the upper input collector switch and select lines.
3. Pick line L1 from the graphics area.

4. Click the lower input collector switch and select lines.
5. Pick line L2 from the graphics area.
6. Click the rightmost switch and select mesh, keep surf.
7. Click create.
8. HyperMesh goes to the automesh module panel. Nodal densities are displayed on each edge
of the new surface.
- To change the density, click the number in the graphics area with the mouse button. The left
mouse button increases the density; the right mouse button decreases it.
9. Click mesh to create a shell mesh of elements on the new surface.
- To undo, click reject immediately after you create the mesh.
- If the surface is unacceptable, click abort to exit immediately the automeshing module panel
without saving the surface that you created.
- If the surface and mesh are acceptable, click return. HyperMesh returns to the ruled panel.
10. To create other types of surfaces and meshes, repeat these steps and select one of the following
mesh and surface options in step 6:
- mesh, dele surf
- mesh, w/o surf
- surface only
To build a ruled surface using nodes:
1. Select the ruled panel on the 2-D page.

2. Click the upper input collector switch and select nodes.
3. Pick nodes 1 and 4 in the graphics area.
4. Click the lower input collector switch and select nodes.
6. Click the rightmost collector switch and select mesh, keep surf.
7. Click create.
of the new surface.

- If the surface is unacceptable, click abort to exit immediately the automeshing module
panel without saving the surface that you created.
- mesh, dele surf
- mesh, w/o surf
- surface only
11. For practice, select a combination of node list and line list entity selection methods to create
surfaces or meshes.
Creating Surfaces and Meshes using the spline panel

In this tutorial, use the spline panel to create 3-D surfaces and meshes from a combination of nodes
and lines.

/tutorials/hm.
simple300.hm file.
6. Click retrieve.

The simple300.hm file.
To build two surface construction lines:
1. Select the lines panel on the Geom page.

3. Select the rightmost switch and select linear.
4. Click create.
The line is displayed.
5. Pick nodes 4 and 20.
6. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to create a new line.
7. Click return.
To build a spline surface using lines:
1. Select the spline panel on the 2-D page.

2. Click the leftmost switch and select lines.
3. Pick lines L1, L2, and the lines that you created in the previous procedure.
5. Click create.

of the new surface.
- mesh, dele surf
- mesh, w/o surf
- surface only
To build a spline surface using nodes:
1. Select the spline panel on the 2-D page.

2. Click the leftmost switch and select nodes.
Note: Spline surfaces are created with either three or four nodes selected. This
does not mean, however, that the spline surface must be planar.
3. Pick nodes 19, 2, 25, and 27 on the model, in that order.
5. Click create.
of the new surface.
- mesh, dele surf
- mesh, w/o surf
- surface only

Creating Surfaces and Meshes using the skin panel
In this tutorial, use the skin panel to create a skin surface and mesh from a set of lines.

5. Select the skin.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under
/tutorials/hm/.
6. HyperMesh returns to the files panel. Note that file = now displays the location of the skin.hm
file.
7. Click retrieve.
The skin.hm file.
To create a skin surface with lines:
1. Select the skin panel on the 2-D page.

2. Click line list.
3. Pick lines L1, L2, L3, and L4 in that order.
4. Select the rightmost switch and select mesh, keep surf.
5. Click create.

of the new surface.
and surface options in step 4:
- mesh, dele surf
- mesh, w/o surf
- surface only
Dragging Lines to Create Surfaces and Shell Meshes

The drag panel allows you to take selected entities, either lines or nodes, and drag them along a
specified vector to create a shell mesh and/or a surface along that vector direction.
4. HyperMesh displays a list of the files and subdirectories in the current directory. Directory
names are followed by a slash.
5. Select the dragdemo.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under
/tutorials/hm/.
dragdemo.hm file.
7. Click retrieve.

The dragdemo.hm file.
To create a surface by dragging lines:
1. Select the drag panel on the 2-D page.

2. Select the drag geoms subpanel.
3. Click the upper input collector switch and select lines.

4. Pick line L1.
5. Click the lower right switch and select mesh, keep surf.
6. To specify the direction along which to drag the line, use the plane and vector collector switch, or
select three nodes. The three nodes specify a plane, and the drag direction is assumed
perpendicular to this plane.
7. Click the plane and vector collector switch and select z-axis as the direction along which to drag
the nodes.
8. Click the distance toggle switch and select distance =.
10. Click drag+.

The line is dragged 50 positive units in the z-axis direction and the new surface is displayed.

of the new surface.
- mesh, dele surf
- mesh, w/o surf
- surface only
Dragging Nodes to Create Surfaces and Shell Meshes

The drag panel allows you to take selected entities, either lines or nodes, and drag them along a
specified vector to create a shell mesh and/or a surface along that vector direction.

/tutorials/hm/.
simple300.hm file.
7. Click retrieve.

The simple300.hm file.
To build a surface using node selections:

3. Click the upper input collector switch and select nodes.
4. Pick nodes 9, 10, and 11 in the graphics area.

6. Click the plane and vector collector switch and select y-axis as the direction along which to drag
the nodes.
7. Click the distance toggle switch and select distance =.
9. Click drag-.
The new surface is displayed.
of the new surface.

- mesh, dele surf
- mesh, w/o surf
- surface only
Creating Surfaces and Shell Meshes with Lines

In this tutorial, use the line drag panel to create surfaces and shell meshes by dragging a line, line
segments, or nodes along a selected curve path.

5. Select the dragdemo.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under
/tutorials/hm/.
dragdemo.hm file.
7. Click retrieve.

The dragdemo.hm file.
To create a surface by dragging lines:
1. Select the line drag panel on the 2-D page.

3. Click the input collector switch after drag: and select lines.
4. Pick line L1.
6. Click the toggle and select use default vector.
7. Click line list to the right of along: and pick line L2 in the graphics area as the guide line along
which to drag the entities.
8. Click drag.
The new surface is displayed.
of the new surface.

- f the surface and mesh are acceptable, click return. HyperMesh returns to the ruled panel.
- mesh, dele surf
- mesh, w/o surf
- surface only
Creating Surfaces and Shell Meshes with Nodes

In this tutorial, use the line drag panel to create surfaces and shell meshes from a combination of
node picks and a 3-D line, which serves as the path curve along which the nodes are dragged.

5. Select the skin.hm file located in the HyperWorks installation directory under
/tutorials/hm/.
6. HyperMesh returns to the files panel. Note that file = now displays the location of the skin.hm
file.
7. Click retrieve.
The skin.hm file.

To create temporary nodes:
1. Select the create nodes panel on the Geom page.

2. Select the on line subpanel.
3. Pick line L1 in the graphics area.

4. Click the data entry field after number of nodes = and enter 6.
5. Click the switch after bias style: and select linear.
6. Click the data entry field after bias intensity = and enter 0.
7. Click create.
Six evenly spaced nodes are displayed in the graphics area.
8. Click return.
To create a mesh of shell elements using the line drag panel:

3. Click the input collector switch after drag: and select nodes.
4. Select the six nodes (in order from 1–6) created previously along line L1.
5. Click line list to the right of along: and pick line L2 in the graphics area as the guide line along
which to drag the entities.
7. Click the toggle and select use default vector.
8. Click drag.
The new surface is displayed in the graphics area.
of the new surface.

- mesh, dele surf
- mesh, w/o surf
- surface only

Building Solid Elements - HM-400
This tutorial demonstrates how to build solid elements using the following panels:
• The solid map panel
• The elem offset panel
• The drag panel
• The line drag panel
administrator.
Solid Map Panel

In this tutorial, use the solid map panel to create solid elements by first extruding an existing 2-D
element mesh, then mapping the extruded mesh into a volume.
4. HyperMesh displays a list of the files and subdirectories in the current directory. Directory
names are followed by a slash, /.
5. Select the solidmap.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under
/tutorials/hm/.
solidmap.hm file.
7. Click retrieve.
8. Click return to exit the files panel.

The solidmap.hm file
To create a new collector for the new solid elements:

3. Click the switch after collector type: and select comps as the type of collector you want to
create.
4. Click name = and type sldelems (or a name of your choice).
Collector names are limited to 32 characters.
5. Click color to display the pop-up menu of color choices.
6. Select Color 5.
7. Click create.
8. Click return.
To create solid elements using the solid map panel:
1. Select the solid map panel on the 3-D page.

2. Select the both subpanel.
3. Click the input collector switch by source: and select surfs.
This specifies the source surface.
4. Pick surface A in the graphics area.
The surface is highlighted when selected.
5. Click the input collector switch by end: and select surfs.
This specifies the end surface.

6. Pick surface B in the graphics area.
The surface is highlighted when selected.
7. Click the input collector switch by along: and select surfs.
The input collector displays surf list. This specifies the “along surface.
8. Pick the three surfaces between the source and end surfaces in the graphics area.
Hold the left mouse button and move the cursor in the graphics area to highlight the surfaces.
Release the left mouse button to select the highlighted surface.
9. Click surf list.
The “along surfaces you selected are highlighted in sequence.
10. Click elems and select displayed from the extended entity selection menu.
This specifies which elements to drag. The plate elements on surface A are displayed.
11. Click density = and enter 10 to indicate the number of rows of elements you want to create
between source surface A and end surface B.
12. Click mesh.
The header bar gives status messages as the elements are generated.
When finished, the model contains ten rows of elements that begin at surface A and end at
surface B. The new solid elements follow the contour of the specified “along surfaces. The hole
in the center of the original shell element mesh is propagated through the solid element mesh.
13. Click return to exit the solid map panel.
To view the model in hidden line mode:
1. Press the function key F1 to access the hidden line menu, or select the hidden line panel on the
Post page.
2. Click fill plot.
The model in hidden line mode
3. Click return.

Elem Offset Panel
In this tutorial, use the elem offset panel to create solid elements by extruding an existing 2-D mesh
in the direction of the element normals.

4. Select the bumper.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under
/tutorials/hm/.
bumper.hm file.
6. Click retrieve.
The bumper.hm file

To change the performance graphics mode and view the model in hidden line mode:
1. Select the options panel on the permanent menu.

2. Select the graphics subpanel.
3. Click the toggle and select performance.
4. Select the vis panel on the permanent menu.
5. Click the Hidden Line with Mesh Lines icon, .

6. Click all.
To orient the element normals in the same direction:
1. Select the normals panel on the Tool page.

2. Select the elements subpanel.
3. Click the switch and select comps.
4. Click comps again and select end2 and mid2 as the component collectors.
5. Click return.
6. Click size = and enter 10 for the size of the normal vectors to be displayed.
7. Click display normals to show the element normals’ directions.
8. Click elem under orientation:.
9. From the graphics area, pick any element in the cyan colored collector end2.
10. Click adjust normals.
The normals of the elements in the green collector, mid2, are the same as the elements in cyan
collector, end2.
To create solid elements using the elem offset panel:
1. Select the elem offset panel on the 3-D page of the main menu.
2. Click elems and select by config from the extended entity selection menu.
3. Click config = and select quad4 from the pop-up menu.
4. Click select entities.
6. Click config = and select tria3 from the pop-up menu.

This selection method can be used to select elements of more than one type in a model.
1. Click number of layers = and enter 3 for the number of rows of elements you want to create.
2. Click total thickness = and enter 5 for the total thickness of the elements you want to create.
3. Click offset + to create the solid elements.

4. Click z on the permanent menu and use the left mouse button to draw a circle around the right
side of the bumper.
Model with solid elements created from faces of shell elements
Note: The solid elements that have been created are extruded from the faces of the
original shell elements. In some cases, the shell elements may have been
modeled at the mid-plane of the solid elements you want to create.
5. Click reject to reject the solid elements.

6. Click offset = and enter –2.5 as the starting position for the solid elements.
7. Click offset to create the solid elements.

Model created with solid elements from shell elements shown at mid-plane
Note: The solid elements that have been created start at a

distance of 2.5 behind the shell elements with a total solid
thickness of 5.
8. Click return to exit the elem offset panel.
Drag Panel
In this tutorial, use the drag panel to create solid elements with a linear bias by extruding an existing
mesh of 2-D elements.

4. Select the drag.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under
/tutorials/hm/.
5. HyperMesh returns to the files panel. Note that file = now displays the location of the drag.hm
file.
6. Click retrieve.

The drag.hm file.
To create solid elements using the drag panel:

2. Select the drag elems subpanel.
4. Click the plane and vector collector switch and select N1, N2, N3.
5. Click N1.
6. Pick any three nodes on the model.
This defines a plane and normal vector from which HyperMesh creates the solid elements.
7. Click the toggle and select distance =.
8. Click distance = and enter 100 for the total thickness of elements you want to create.
9. Click on drag = and enter 20 for the number of rows of solid elements you want to create.
10. Click bias intensity = and enter 10 for the intensity.
11. Click drag.
The solid elements are created.
12. Click return to exit the drag panel.

To view the model in hidden line mode:
1. Press the function key F1 to access the hidden line menu, or select the hidden line panel on the
Post page.
2. Click fill plot.
3. Click z on the permanent menu and use the left mouse button to draw a circle around the right
side of the bumper.
Note: Each row of elements gets progressively thicker due to the linear bias.
Experiment with the exponential and bellcurve bias styles.
Line Drag Panel

In this tutorial, use the line drag panel to create solid elements by extruding an existing mesh of 2-D
elements along more than one non-linear line.


4. Select the linedrag.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under
/tutorials/hm/.
linedrag.hm file.
6. Click retrieve.
The linedrag.hm file.

5. Click the Hidden Line with Mesh Lines icon, .

6. Click all.

To create the solid elements using the line drag panel:

2. Select the drag elems subpanel.
This selects the shell elements that define the section of the solid mesh you want to create.
4. Click line list next to along:.
5. Pick the two lines that define the helical spring from the graphics area.
Hold the left mouse button and move the cursor in the graphics area to highlight each line.
Release the left mouse button to select each highlighted line.
6. Click on drag = and enter 200 for the number of rows of solid elements you want to create.
7. Click drag to create the mesh.
The header bar displays status messages as the elements are created.
Model with solid elements created
8. Click reject to reject the solid mesh that was created.

9. Practice by clicking the use default vector toggle and selecting specify vector. Also, define a
bias style: and a value for bias intensity =

Note: If you select specify vector, use the plane and vector collector to select the
orientation vector.
For more information on the biasing options, refer to the Element Biasing section
in the Automatic Mesh Generation chapter of the User’s Manual.
10. Click drag to create a new solid mesh based on the changes made.
11. Click return to accept the new solid mesh and access the main menu.

Using the Automatic Tetramesher - HM-450
This tutorial demonstrates how to use the tetra mesh, tetra remesh and CFD mesh subpanels
available in the tetramesh panel.
The following functions allow you create a solid model of tetrahedral elements from an enclosed
volume tria surface mesh:
floatable Matches the node locations of the tetras with the trias, but the
connectivity of those tetras may be modified to produce a better
mesh. Normally, this results in some tetra faces going across tria
diagonals.
fixed Matches the node locations of the tetras with the trias. It
guarantees the connectivity of the tetras with the trias. Use this
option whenever you need to match other components to the
resulting tetra mesh.
prism trias Selects the tria elements that define the surface from which the
layers of high aspect ratio are used when creating a CFD mesh.
normal trias Selects the tria elements that do not need high aspect ratio tetra
layers. This performs the same function as the normal trias option
in the standard tetramesh panel.
boundary layer prisms Specifies the layer thickness parameters as appropriate for the
Reynold’s number for the fluid being studied.
init thickness: thickness of first layer of high aspect ratio tetras
init growth rate: growth rate for high aspect ratio tetra layers
acceleration: growth acceleration for high aspect ratio tetra layer
Note: Prism growth parameters: If d is the initial thickness, r is

the initial growth rate, and a is the growth acceleration,
then the thicknesses of the successive prism layers is d,
d*r, d*r2*a, d*r3*a2, d*r4*a3,...
structured isotropic prisms Uses the local element size for the initial thickness and a value of
1.0 for the growth rate and acceleration. You can use structured
isotropic prism layers in any situation where ordered layers of tetras
are required near the surface. The mesher uses as many layers as
possible of isotropic elements until the elements in the next layer
are of unacceptable quality, and then it switches to the normal
meshing algorithm.
generate mesh normally Applies in most applications, and uses the standard tetra-meshing
algorithm as in previous versions of HyperMesh. This option is
available in each tetramesh subpanel.
optimize meshing speed Uses an algorithm which optimizes meshing speed. Use this option
if element quality considerations are less important than mesh
generation time. This option is available in each tetramesh
subpanel.

optimize meshing quality Directs the tetramesher to spend more time trying to generate the
best shaped elements. It employs the volumetric ratio, or CFD
skew, measurement for rating potential tetras. Use this option if
your solver is sensitive to element quality. This option is available
in each tetramesh subpanel.
growth rate The growth rate for normal trias and after prism elements are
complete.
initial layers The number of initial layers for normal trias after prism elements
are complete.
growth options Various growth options can be specified in order to control the
tradeoff between the number of tetras generated and the element
quality. Options that can be selected are standard, aggressive,
gradual, interpolate and user controlled. The standard option is
suggested for most conditions. For a detailed explanation of these
parameters, please consult the HyperMesh on-line Help.
The following tutorials are included:
• Tetramesh a Volume
• Tetra Remesh a Selected Group of Elements
• Tetramesh Using the CFD Algorithm
administrator.
The Tetramesh Panel

The tetramesh panel allows you to fill an enclosed volume with first or second order tetrahedral
elements. A region is considered enclosed if it is entirely bounded by a mesh of tria elements where
each tria has material on one side and open space on the other.
You can specify trias as fixed and floatable. Under most circumstances, select only those trias that
must match up to another pre-existing mesh as fixed. You can also specify various growth options in
order to control the tradeoff between the number of tetras generated and the average and minimum
element qualities. Higher, more aggressive growth rates produce fewer elements, but they may be of
poor quality.

4. Select the tetmesh.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under
/tutorials/hm/.
tetmesh.hm file.
5. Click retrieve.
tetmesh.hm model file.
To tetra mesh the enclosed volume:
1. Select the tetramesh panel on the 3-D page.
2. Select the tetra mesh subpanel.
3. Click the switch below floatable trias: and select comps from the pop-up menu.
4. Pick an element that belongs to the component.
or
Click the upper comps and select trias, then click return.
5. Click the switch below growth option: and select standard from the pop-up menu.
6. Click the lower right switch and select generate mesh normally from the pop-up menu.
7. Click tetmesh.

Note: The header bar displays status messages as the elements are created. The right
mouse button allows you to cancel the tetramesh operation.
Elements that cause the tetramesher to fail are highlighted and placed into a buffer for
later retrieval. See The Tetra Remesh Panel for a description on retrieving and isolating
these elements for inspection.
The Tetra Remesh Panel

The tetra remesh subpanel allows you to regenerate the mesh for a single volume of tetras. The
tetras you select form a single connected region. This command allows you to locally remesh an
area where poor quality tetras may exist. Look for a concentration of bad elements and use a
combination of the mask and find panels to locate a collection of neighboring tetras to remesh.
4. Select the tetremesh.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under
/tutorials/hm/.
tetremesh.hm file.
5. Click retrieve.
To identify tetra elements with poor quality:
1. Select the check elems panel on the Tool page.
2. Select the 3-D subpanel.
3. After tetra collapse, enter the value 0.10.
4. Click tetra collapse.
5. Once elements are highlighted, click save failed.
Note: The header bar relays the message that the minimum tetra collapse is 0.00, a tetra
element that does not occupy a volume. The save failed operation places the bad

elements that show a tetra collapse value less than what is specified in a buffer, allowing
the elements to be retrieved later.
tetremesh.hm model file.
To isolate the save failed elements:
1. Select the mask panel on the Tool page.
2. Select the mask subpanel.
3. Click the switch and select elems from the pop-up menu.
4. Click elems and select retrieve from the extended entity selection menu.
The save failed elements become highlighted.
5. Click elems and select reverse from the extended entity selection window.
All the elements excluding the save failed become highlighted.
6. Click mask .
Only the save failed elements should remain.

To find elements attached to the displayed element:
1. Select the find panel on the Tool page.
2. Select the find attached subpanel.
3. Click the upper switch and select elems from the pop-up menu.
4. Click the lower switch and select elems from the pop-up menu.
5. Select the displayed element.
6. Click find.
To tetra remesh the selected group of elements:
2. Select the tetra remesh subpanel.
Elements to be remeshed become highlighted.
4. Click remesh.
To unmask previously masked elements:
3. Click unmask all.
To review the newly created elements:
2. Select the 3-D subpanel.
3. Click tetra collapse.
The minimum tetra collapse is now 0.20.
4. Continue to tetra remesh until element quality is satisfactory.
5. Click return to access the main menu

CFD Mesh
The accuracy with which a solution is resolved is directly related to the number of elements in regions
of high solution gradient. In most CFD applications, this is near the surface of the flow and is called
boundary layer behavior. Consequently, the mesh is generated so that it clusters many elements
near the surface. The CFD mesh subpanel utilizes floatable trias which allow you to pack many
layers of high aspect ratio tetras against a surface in order to resolve boundary layer behavior in the
solution.
Using the normal algorithm, if you pack many elements against the surface, many of the elements will
have some very obtuse face angles, which often cause problems for solvers. For the prism layer
algorithm, the tetra elements are generated in prism-shaped groups of three or more in such a way to
prevent large angles from appearing. Arbitrarily, many of these high aspect ratio tetras can be
layered against the surface as needed in order to resolve the boundary layer behavior. They are
generated with very thin initial layers, growing in thickness with an accelerating growth rate until the
layer thickness is the same as the width of the prism, at which point the tetramesher switches to its
normal algorithm to efficiently fill the remaining volume.
4. Select the sphere.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under
/tutorials/hm/.
sphere.hm file.
5. Click retrieve.
To switch to performance graphics and display a model in hidden line mode:
3. Click the toggle after engine: and select performance.
6. Click the hidden line with mesh lines icon, , the third icon from the left below the all button.

7. Click all.
8. Click mesh color and select Color 0 from the pop-up menu.
To create a new component for the tetra elements:
3. Click name = and enter tetras.
4. Click color and select a color for the new collector from the pop-up window.
5. Click create.
6. Select return to access the main menu.
Note: For this exercise we have created a component collector that does not reference a
solver template. For more information on how to associate a solver to a collector,
see the HyperMesh on-line Help.
To tetramesh using the CFD meshing subpanel:
2. Select the CFD mesh subpanel.
3. Click the switch below prism trias: and select comps from the pop-up menu.
4. Pick an element that belongs to the component.
or
Click the upper comps and select trias, then click return.
5. Click the toggle and select boundary layer prisms.
6. Click the lower right switch and select generate mesh normally from the pop-up menu.
7. Click init thickness = and enter the value 0.5.
8. Scroll through the other options using the TAB key and assign the following values:
init growth rate = 1.100
acceleration = 1.100
growth rate = 1.250
initial layers = 0.750

9. Click tetmesh.
10. Select return to access the main menu.
Volume enclosed tria mesh.
To use the mask panel to view the interior of the tetramesh model:
2. Select top.
6. Click elems and select by window from the extended entity selection menu.
7. Click interior.
8. Using the left mouse button to define the corners of your window, select elements from the right
half of the model.
10. Click mask .

12. Click the hidden line with mesh lines icon, , the third icon from the left below the all button.
13. Click all.
15. Select rear.
Section cut of tetra mesh volume using CFD mesh.

Splitting and Combining Shell Elements - HM-500L
This tutorial demonstrates how to split and combine shell elements using the split and edit element
panels. Splitting and combining elements allows you to refine or coarsen meshes and correct
element-to-element connectivity.

• Splitting shell elements using the edit element panel
• Splitting shell elements using the split panel
• Combining shell elements using the edit element panel
administrator.
See Also
See the following panels in the HyperMesh Panels On-line Help for more information:
• edges
• check elements
• split-hexa elements subpanel
• solid elements subpanel
Splitting Shell Elements using the edit element panel

In this tutorial, use the edit element panel to split shell elements.
The split sub-panel allows you to split an arbitrary number of shell elements by drawing a split line
over them. The splitting algorithm used depends on how the split line crosses the element.

are followed by a slash, /.
4. Select the el_edit_split.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under
/tutorials/hm/.
el_edit_split.hm file.
6. Click retrieve.

To split shell elements using the edit element panel:
1. Select the edit element panel on the 2-D page.

2. Select the split subpanel.
3. Click the switch and select elems.
4. Click split.
5. Use the mouse to build a line in the graphics area that intersects the elements A - E.
To draw the line:
- Position the cursor on element A, pressing the left mouse button.
- Draw the line from element A to element B and release the left mouse button.
- Repeat these steps to draw a line from elements B to C, C to D, and D to E.
This specifies the elements you want to split.
6. Click split elements.

7. You can use the split panel to split elements in the following ways:
- Across opposite edges, creating 2 quads
- Along adjacent edges, creating 3 quads
- From an edge to a vertex , creating one tria and one quad
- From one vertex to its diagonally opposite vertex, creating 2 trias.
Note: Tria elements can be split in a similar manner.
In this tutorial, an element is split when the split line crosses two of its edges. This
feature is useful if you have several ‘layers’ of duplicated shell elements that need to be
split.
If you select elements before drawing the split line, only the selected elements are split.
If you do not select elements before drawing the split line, the splitting algorithm
operates on all elements displayed.
If you split elements on a surface that has been automeshed, new nodes created by the
split are automatically projected to the surface.
Maintain proper connectivity (without internal free edges) after splitting the elements.
Splitting Shell Elements using the split panel

In this tutorial, use the split panel to split shell elements. The split panel allows you to split elements
simultaneously using one of four algorithms.


4. Select the split.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under
/tutorials/hm/.
5. HyperMesh returns to the files panel. Note that file = now displays the location of the split.hm
file.
6. Click retrieve.
To split shell elements using the split panel:
1. Select the split panel on the 2-D page.

2. Select the plate elements subpanel.
3. Pick elements A - E.
4. Click the switch and select divide quads.

5. Click split.
The selected quads are split into trias.

Note: The methods available for splitting plate elements include:
split all sides - splits an element at the midpoint of its sides
divide quads - divides all the quad element s into trias and allows you to fix quads
with severe warpage
midpoint - to trias - partitions an element by creating a node at its centroid and forms
trias using the element’s vertices
midpoint - to quads partitions an element by creating a node at its centroid and forms
quads using the midpoints of each of its sides
When you split elements whose nodes are associated to a surface, the new nodes
created are also on the surface. To associate a node to a surface, use the node edit
panel.
Maintain proper connectivity (without any internal free edges) after combining
elements.
Combining Shell Elements using the edit element panel

In this tutorial, combine shell elements using the edit element panel.
The combine subpanel on the edit element panel allows you to combine an arbitrary number of shell
elements simultaneously or a set number of shell elements automatically. Both methods are
controlled by the tolerance = and angle = functions. When elements are being combined,
HyperMesh requires the nodes attached to the elements to be planar within a user-specified
tolerance. The tolerance may be changed with the menu item tolerance =.
When elements are being combined, HyperMesh performs node condensation on mid-side nodes.
Nodes are considered to be mid-side nodes if the angle between any three nodes in the set of nodes
being condensed is greater than a user-specified angle. The angle may be changed with the menu
item angle =.


4. Select the el_edit_comb.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under
/tutorials/hm/.
el_edit_comb.hm file.
6. Click retrieve.
To combine an arbitrary number of elements:
1. Select the edit element panel on the 2-D page.

2. Select the combine subpanel.
3. Click tolerance = and enter 0.010.
4. Click auto comb = and enter 4.
5. Pick elements A, B, C, and D.
6. HyperMesh displays the following error message: The elements selected are not planar for the
given tolerance.
8. Click combine.
The selected elements become one element.

To automatically combine a set number of elements:
The auto comb = function allows you to combine elements automatically.
1. Click auto comb = and enter 2.

2. Pick elements E and F.
HyperMesh combines the elements automatically.
Note: Setting tolerance = too high may create warped elements, and/or the deviation
from the geometry may increase.
Maintain proper connectivity (without any internal free edges) after combining
elements.

Editing Elements by Moving Nodes - HM-510L
This tutorial demonstrates how to edit elements by moving the nodes attached to them. This tutorial
uses the distance, align node, replace, and node edit panels.

• Changing the Distance Between Nodes
• Replacing Nodes
• Aligning Nodes
• Placing Nodes
administrator.
See Also
Refer to the following panels in the HyperMesh Panels On-line Help to learn more about the utilities
for node/mesh manipulation:
Permute
Project
Reflect
Rotate
Translate
Changing the Distance Between Nodes

The distance panel allows you to determine the distance between two nodes or the angle between
three nodes, or to change distances or angles. In this tutorial, use the distance panel to change the
distance between nodes.

4. Select the node_editing.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under
/tutorials/hm/.

node_editing.hm file.
6. Click retrieve.
To change the distance between nodes:
1. Select the distance panel on the Geom page.

2. Select the two nodes subpanel.
3. Pick node 1 on the model while N1 is highlighted.
4. Pick node 2 on the model while N2 is highlighted.
The total distance between the nodes is displayed as 39.500 in the distance = field.
Note: The total distance is further broken down into the components’ distances and
displayed in x dist =, y dist =, and z dist =. These distances are updated when the
total distance is changed. You can also edit these distances individually, upon
which the total distance and other component distances change.
5. Click the data entry field after distance = and enter 27.0.
N2 moves along the N1 - N2 vector to reflect this change.

6. Click return to exit the distance panel.
Undo
• Click reject.
Replacing Nodes
The replace panel allows nodes to be replaced with other nodes. Use this function if you want to
manually equivalence two nodes.
Use the node_editing.hm file used in the previous tutorial, Changing the Distance Between
Nodes:
To replace a node:
1. Select the replace panel on the 1-D, 2-D or 3-D page.

2. Click equivalence if it is not already selected.
3. Click z on the permanent menu and draw a circle around nodes A, B, C, and D.
4. Click the upper node list and pick node A on the model.
5. Click the lower node list and pick node B on the model.
Node A moves to the position of node B.

6. Click at mid-point.
7. Click the upper node list and pick node C on the model.
8. Click the lower node list and pick node D on the model.
The nodes move to the midpoint of their original locations.
9. Click return to exit the replace panel.
Undo
• Click the right mouse button immediately after the nodes have been replaced, or click reject.
Note: The nodes are equivalenced if you select equivalence. You may move nodes
only if equivalence is not selected.
You can select the second node at any location on a line or along a surface. In
this case, select the node on the line or surface by first highlighting the line or
surface, then selecting the preferred location on the line or surface.

Aligning Nodes
The align node panel allows you to project nodes to an imaginary line passing through two nodes.
Nodes being projected do not have to lie between the two nodes selected to form the line. The nodes
are projected to the imaginary line along its normal. This function is mostly used on planar meshes
where straightened mesh lines improve mesh quality.
Use the node_editing.hm file used in the previous tutorials, Changing the Distance Between
Nodes and Replacing Nodes.
To align a node:
1. Select the align node panel on the Geom page.

2. Select b on the permanent menu to go back to the previous view of the model.
3. Click the upper node list and pick node 3 on the model.
4. Click the lower node list and pick node 4 on the model.
Nodes 3 and 4 define the vector along which other nodes selected are aligned.
5. Pick nodes 5, 6, and 7 on the model.

Each node moves to a position along the vector defined by the nodes 3 and 4.

6. Click return to exit the align nodes panel.
Undo
• Click the right mouse button immediately after selecting a node.
Placing Nodes
The node edit panel allows you to associate nodes to a surface, move nodes along a surface, or
place a node at a point on a surface. In this tutorial, use the place node option on the node edit
panel. This option is used to select a node and reposition it to any location on a selected surface.
Use the node_editing.hm file used in the previous tutorials, Changing the Distance Between
Nodes, Replacing Nodes, and Aligning Nodes.
To place a node:
1. Select the node edit panel on the Geom page.

2. Select the place node subpanel.
3. Click z on the permanent menu and draw a circle around E and X in the graphics area.

4. While destination surf is highlighted, pick the surface to which to associate the node by
selecting on or near one of the surface lines.
5. While node to place is highlighted, pick node E.
6. Pick a point near X in the graphics area.
The node is moved to that location on the surface.
Undo
• Click the right mouse button or click reject.

Note: You can check elements while using the place node on the node edit panel. To
do this, press the F10 key, check the element(s) in question, and click return to
access the node edit panel.
Placing a node on a surface associates the node to the surface. Once a node
has been placed on a surface, another node can be placed on the same surface
by picking the new node and then the surface (you do not have to reselect the
surface).

Model Checking - HM-520
This tutorial demonstrates how to use the check elements and edges panels. The check elements
panel verifies the quality of elements. The edges panel allows you to find free edges and
equivalences nodes on edges.
Some of the terms used when checking element quality include:
Warpage The amount by which an element or element face (in the case of solid elements)
deviates from being planar. Warpage of up to five degrees is generally
acceptable.
Aspect Ratio The ratio of the element's longest edge to its shortest edge. Aspect ratios should
be less than 5:1 in most cases.
Skew The angle between the lines that join opposite midsides.
Jacobian A measure of the deviation of an element from an ideally shaped element. The
Jacobian value ranges from 0.0 to 1.0, where 1.0 represents a perfectly shaped
element. However, Jacobian values of 0.7 and above are generally acceptable.

• Testing Elements for Warpage
• Testing Elements for Aspect Ratio
• Finding Duplicate Nodes and Free Edges in the Model
administrator.
Testing Elements for Warpage

In this tutorial, identify those elements with excessive warpage and view the saved failed elements.

4. Select the modelchk_final.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under
/tutorials/hm/.
modelchk_final.hm file.
6. Click retrieve.


5. Click the Hidden Line with Mesh Lines icon,

6. Click all.
7. Click return twice to access the files panel.
To test elements for warpage:

2. Select the 3-D subpanel to indicate the type of element you want to check.
3. Click the data entry field after warpage > and enter 5.0 to specify the maximum allowable
warpage.
4. Click warpage.
The elements that have a warpage value higher than the value specified are highlighted. These
elements are also defined as failed elements.
5. The number of failed elements and the maximum warpage value are displayed in the header bar.
6. Pick any of the highlighted elements from the graphics area to check the warpage of the
individual elements

To save failed elements:
Isolate the failed elements with the save failed option. The save failed option allows you to place
entities that are not written to the deck on the user mark. This situation occurs if there is no definition
for the entity’s configuration and type in the specified template.
1. Click save failed.

2. Click return.
To view the saved failed elements only:

The failed elements are highlighted.
5. Click elems and select reverse from the extended entity selection menu.
6. Click mask .
Only the failed elements are displayed. This function may be necessary when you are working
with a large number of elements.
7. Click return.

Testing Elements for Aspect Ratio
In this tutorial, identify those elements with high aspect ratios and view the saved failed elements.

/tutorials/hm/.
6. Click retrieve.
To check elements for aspect ratio:

2. Select the 3-D subpanel to indicate the type of element you want to check.
3. Click the data entry field after aspect > and enter 5.0 to specify the maximum allowable aspect
ratio.
4. Click aspect.

The elements that have an aspect ratio value higher than the value specified are highlighted.
These elements are defined as failed elements.
5. The number of elements failed and the maximum aspect ratio are displayed in the header bar.
6. Pick any of the highlighted elements from the graphics area to check the aspect ratio of the
elements individually.
To save failed elements:
Isolate the failed elements with the save failed option. The save failed option allows you to place
entities that are not written to the deck on the user mark. This situation occurs if there is no definition
for the entity’s configuration and type in the specified template.
1. Click save failed.

2. Click return.
To view the saved failed elements only:
1. Select the mask panel from the Tool page.

The failed elements are highlighted.
5. Click elems and select reverse from the extended entity selection menu.
6. Click mask .
Only the failed elements are displayed. This function may be necessary when you are working
with a large number of elements.
7. Click return.
Finding Duplicate Nodes and Free Edges in the Model

In this tutorial, find the duplicate nodes and free edges and equivalence these nodes.

/tutorials/hm/.
6. Click retrieve.

To find and equivalence the duplicate nodes:
1. Select the faces panel on the Tool page.

3. Click elems and select displayed on the extended entity selection menu.
5. Select preview equivalence.
Temporary nodes are created on all the duplicate nodes.
1. Select equivalence.
2. All duplicate nodes are equivalenced.
3. Click return.
Note: Duplicate nodes are within the specified tolerance and have the same location as the
other nodes; however, they have not been equivalenced.
To find free edges:
1. Select the edges panel on the Tool page.

4. Click find edges.
5. Click return.

To view the edges only:
The edges created are 1-D elements. To view them alone, turn off the display of the other elements.

2. Click the upper input collector switch and select comps.
3. Click the toggle and select elems.
4. Click none.
5. Click êdges.
6. Click return.
To validate the free edges, analyze them with respect to the geometry of the model. If there are
invalid free edges, it means there are duplicate nodes that need to be equivalenced. The model
in the graphics area contains an invalid free edge:

8. Click all.
The other elements are displayed.
9. Click return.
To equivalence the remaining duplicate nodes:

2. Click delete edges to delete the edge elements.
6. Click preview equivalence.
Four nodes were found that have not been equivalenced.

7. Click equivalence.
8. Click return.
To recheck for free edges:

4. Click find edges.
5. Click return.
To review the edges:

2. Click none.
3. Click êdges.
4. Click return.
There are no free edges other than the valid ones.

Using OptiStruct in HyperMesh - HM-550
This tutorial demonstrates how to retrieve a HyperMesh database containing a fully defined Optistruct
database, export the input deck, and run an Optistruct job from the solver panel in HyperMesh.
• Running Optistruct
• Running OptiStruct at the Command Prompt
• Analysis of a Plate with a Hole
• Analysis of a Coffee Pot Lid with Thermal Loads
• Normal Modes Analysis of a Splash Shield
administrator.
Running Optistruct

HyperMesh displays a list of the files and subdirectories in the current directory. Directories are
followed by a slash, /.
4. Select the plate.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under
/tutorials/hm.
5. Click retrieve.
To write the Optistruct .fem input deck file:
Write your Optistruct input deck (usually specified with the .fem extension) before running Optistruct.

2. Select the export subpanel.
3. Click template = and type in optistruct/optistruct. Or, click template = a second time
and select the optistruct template file in the optistruct directory.
4. Click filename = and enter plate.fem.
5. Click write.
This writes your HyperMesh database as an Optistruct ASCII input deck.

To run Optistruct:
1. Select the solver panel on the BCs page.

2. Click the upper switch and select OPTISTRUCT.
HyperMesh loads the path to the OptiStruct executable in the solver = field. You do not need to
edit this field.
3. Click input file = and enter plate.fem, the Optistruct input deck. Or, click input file = again
and browse your directory structure for the file plate.fem.
4. Click memory in Mb = and enter 10 for the RAM required in MB. RAM is directly dependent
upon the number of grids in your model. As a starting point, use 8MB/1000/grids/nodes. You can
perform a test that allows Optistruct to calculate a recommended amount of RAM for your model.
5. Click solve.
This launches the Optistruct job. If the job is successful, results files are created and stored in
the directory from which HyperMesh is launched. The plate.out file contains error messages
that can help you debug your input deck if necessary.
6. Click return.
The default files written to your directory are:
Plate.res The HyperMesh binary results file.
Plate.HM.ent.cmf A HyperMesh command file used to organize elements into

entity sets based on their density result values (only used with
OptiStruct topology optimization runs).
Plate.HM.comp.cmf A HyperMesh command file used to organize elements into

components based on their density result values (only used with
OptiStruct topology optimization runs).
Plate.out The OptiStruct output file containing specific information on the

file set-up, the set-up of your optimization problem, an estimate
for the amount of RAM and disk space required for the run,
information for each optimization iteration, and computation time
information. Review this file for warnings and errors that are
flagged from processing the plate_hole.fem file.
Plate.oslog The OptiStruct log file containing compliance and volume

calculations for each optimization iteration.

Running OptiStruct at the Command Prompt
In the section Running Optistruct, you ran OptiStruct from the solver panel in HyperMesh. You can
also run OptiStruct from the command prompt (UNIX or MS-DOS). To run OptiStruct from UNIX or
MS-DOS, copy the OptiStruct file plate.fem to the HyperWorks installation directory,
$ALTAIR_HOME for MS-DOS and $ALTAIR_HOME/scripts for UNIX.
For UNIX:
To run OptiStruct from the UNIX command prompt, type:
• $ALTAIR_HOME/scripts/optistruct plate.fem -len 10
To check the current version of OptiStruct, type:
• $ALTAIR_HOME/scripts/optistruct -version
To perform a test run to validate your input deck and determine how much RAM and disk
space is necessary for the run, type:
• $ALTAIR_HOME/scripts/optistruct plate.fem -len 10 -check

• Memory requirement information is written to the file plate.out
For MS-DOS:
To run OptiStruct from the MS-DOS command prompt, type:
• $ALTAIR_HOME\optistruct\3.4\bin\opti plate.fem 10
To check the current version of OptiStruct, type:
• $ALTAIR_HOME\optistruct\3.4\bin\opti -version
To perform a test run to validate your input deck and to determine how much RAM and disk
space is necessary for the run, add the check parameter to your input deck and run OptiStruct
from the MS-DOS prompt:
• $ALTAIR_HOME\optistruct\3.4\bin\opti plate.fem 10
• Memory requirement information is written to plate.out

Analysis of a Plate with a Hole
In this tutorial, create finite elements on a given geometry of a plate with a hole, apply boundary
conditions, and perform a finite element analysis of the problem. Use the post-processing tools in
HyperMesh to determine deformation and stress characteristics of the loaded plate.

HyperMesh displays a list of the files and subdirectories in the current directory. Directories are
followed by a slash, /.
4. Select the plate_hole.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under
/tutorials/hm.
5. Click retrieve.
To define the OptiStruct template:

2. Double-click template file =.
3. Select the optistruct template file in the optistruct directory. Selecting the OptiStruct
template allows you to define OptiStruct-specific attributes in your HyperMesh session.
To define material properties and element thickness:
Create the material collectors before creating the component collectors; components must reference
a material collector.

3. Select the switch after collector type: and select mats.
4. Click name = and enter steel.
The MAT1 card image is loaded for the material steel.
7. Click E to make the status title active.
Note: A status title is displayed as yellow (off) or blue (on). The status title toggles between the
two options when you click it. It is not necessary to define a density value since only a
static analysis is required. Density values are required, however, for normal modes
analysis.
8. Click the data entry field under E and enter 2E5.

9. Click NU, click the data entry field under NU, and enter 0.3.
10. Click return.
11. Select the switch after collector type: and select comps.
12. Click name = and enter shells.
14. Click material = and select steel.
This loads the PSHELL card image for the new component, shells. It also assigns color 8 to the
elements that are organized into this component, and assigns the material steel to this
component.
17. Click T to make the status title active.
18. Click the data entry field under T and enter 10.
OptiStruct stores information regarding shell thickness on the PSHELL card.
19. Click return.
A component is created named shells. Any elements created and organized into the shells
component have thickness attributes defined on the PSHELL card for the shells component (T =
10.0mm). The elements have material attributes defined on the MAT1 card by the material
collector steel, since the shells component references this material.
20. Click return again to access the main menu.
Use the card image subpanel to edit the card images for these collectors.
Use the update subpanel to define a different material for the components.
To mesh the geometry:
The automeshing module allows you to mesh interactively on surfaces. It also includes some tools
for manipulating surface edges and meshing fixed points (locations where the mesher is required to
place a node). The elements generated are organized into the current component, shells.

2. Select the surface displayed in the graphics area and click mesh.
3. Click using size = and enter 40.
4. Click recalc all.
5. Click mesh.
The automesher creates about 400 elements on the surface.

Plate mesh using element size of 40mm
6. Click return to save the mesh in the shells component.

Applying Boundary Conditions to the Model
In this section, the model is constrained such that two of the four edges cannot move. A total lateral
load of 1000N is applied at the edge of the hole so that all forces point in the positive z-direction.
To create collectors:

4. Click name = and enter spcs.
6. Click create.
7. Click name = again and enter forces.
9. Click create.

To create constraints:

2. Click loadcol = and select spcs.
3. Click return.
4. Select the constraints panel on the BCs page.
5. Click nodes and select by window from the extended entity selection menu.
HyperMesh goes to the build window panel.
6. Click interior if not already selected.
7. Create a window around the left and right edges of the model. Do this by picking points on the
screen with your mouse.
The nodes along the left and right edges of the model are selected (see the figure below).
HyperMesh returns to the constraints panel.
Select these nodes to apply single point constraints
9. Click dof1 - dof6, if not already selected.

Note: Dofs that are checked are constrained.
Dofs 1,2, and 3 are x, y, and z translation degrees of freedom
Dofs 4, 5, and 6 are x, y, and z rotational degrees of freedom.
10. Click create to apply these constraints to the selected nodes.

To create forces on the nodes around the hole:

2. Click loadcol = and select forces.
3. Click return.
5. Select the forces panel on the BCs page.
HyperMesh goes to the build window panel.
7. Click interior if not already selected.
8. Create a window around the hole of the model. Do this by picking points on the screen with your
mouse.
The nodes around the hole of the model are selected (see the figure below).
Select these nodes to create loading around the hole
10. Click nodes and select save from the extended entity selection menu.
11. Click return.
12. Select the count panel on the Tool page.
The nodes are counted automatically so that a calculation can be made to create a total force of
1000N.
13. Click the upper left switch and select nodes.
14. Click nodes and select retrieve from the extended entity selection menu.
15. The nodes saved in the forces panel are retrieved.

16. Click selected to count the number of nodes around the hole.
17. Click return.
19. Click nodes and select retrieve.
20. Click magnitude = and enter 1000/total number of nodes (the count), see step 12.
21. Click the vector definition switch below magnitude = and select z-axis.
22. Click create.
23. Click return.
The last step in setting up the boundary conditions is to create a NASTRAN subcase (a load
step in HyperMesh).
1. Select the load steps panel on the BCs page.

2. Click name = and enter lateral force.
3. Click loadcols and select spcs and forces.
4. Click select.
5. Click create.
The load step has been created.
6. Click return.
Submitting the job

To write the file:
Write your Optistruct input deck (usually specified with the .fem extension) before running Optistruct.

3. Click template = and type in optistruct/optistruct. Or, click template = a second time
and select the optistruct template file in the optistruct directory.
4. Click filename = and enter plate_hole.fem.
5. Click write.
6. Click return.
To run Optistruct:

2. Click the upper switch and select OPTISTRUCT.
HyperMesh loads the direct path to the OptiStruct executable in the solver = field. You do not
need to edit this field.
3. Click input file = and enter plate_hole.fem, the Optistruct input deck. Or, click input file =
again and browse your directory structure for the file plate_hole.fem.

upon the number of grids in your model. As a starting point, use 8MB/1000 grids or nodes. You
can perform a test that allows Optistruct to calculate a recommended amount of RAM for your
model.
5. Click solve.
6. This launches the Optistruct job. If the job is successful, results files are created in the directory
from which you select the file plate_hole.fem. The plate_hole.out file contains error
messages that can help you debug your input deck if necessary.
The default files written to your directory include:
Plate_hole.res The HyperMesh binary results file.
Plate_hole.HM.ent.cmf A HyperMesh command file used to organize elements into
entity sets based on their density result values (only used
with OptiStruct topology optimization runs).
Plate_hole.HM.comp.cmf A HyperMesh command file used to organize elements into
components based on their density result values (only used
with OptiStruct topology optimization runs).
Plate_hole.out The OptiStruct output file containing specific information on
the file set-up, the set-up of your optimization problem, an
estimate for the amount of RAM and disk space required for
the run, information for each optimization iteration, and
computation time information. Review this file for warnings
and errors that are flagged from processing the
plate_hole.fem file.
Plate_hole.oslog The OptiStruct log file containing compliance and volume
Viewing the results

OptiStruct generates displacement and von Mises stress results for your linear static analysis. This
section describes how to view those results in HyperMesh. You need to load your HyperMesh binary
results file to view your results.
To load the results file:
1. Select the files panel on any page in HyperMesh.

2. Select the results subpanel.
3. Click files = and enter plate_hole.res. Or, click files = a second time and browse your
directory structure for the file.
4. Click return.
To view a deformed shape:
1. Select the deformed panel on the Post page.

2. Click simulation = and select lateral force.
3. Click model units = and enter 250.
4. Click deform to view a deformed plot of your model overlaid on the original, undeformed mesh
(refer to the figure below).

5. Select the view panel on the permanent menu and select iso 1.
Isometric view of deformed plot overlaid on original, undeformed mesh. Model units are set to 250.

7. Select the view panel on the permanent menu and select top.
To view a contour plot of stresses and displacements:

2. Click the toggle after engine: to performance.
3. Click return.
4. Select the contour panel on the Post page.
5. Click simulation = and select lateral force.
6. Click data type = and select displacements.
7. Click contour.
8. Click data type = and select von Mises stress.
9. Click assign.
10. Click contour and compare your model to the figure below.
11. Click return.

von Mises stress plot using discrete contours (performance graphics selected)
Analysis of Coffee Pot Lid with Thermal Loads

In this tutorial, apply boundary conditions and perform a finite element analysis of an existing finite
element model of a plastic coffee pot lid. Use the post-processing tools in HyperMesh to determine
deformation and stress characteristics of the loaded plate.
Before importing the model for this tutorial, delete the current model from HyperMesh.
To delete the current model:

3. Click yes to delete the current model.
Deleting the current model clears the current HyperMesh database. Information saved in .hm
files is not affected.

3. Double-click file = and select the file coffee_lid.hm, located in the HyperWorks installation
directory under /tutorials/hm/.
4. Click retrieve.

By default, HyperMesh sizes the icons that represent the temperature loads to 100% of the
temperature magnitude. These icons may be too large with respect to the model size.
To change the size, follow these steps:

2. Click the upper switch and select loadcols.
3. Click none to turn off the thermal loading.
4. Click f to maximize the view of the displayed collectors in the graphics area.
5. Click return.
To define your OptiStruct template:

4. Select the optistruct template file in the optistruct directory. Selecting the OptiStruct
template allows you to define OptiStruct-specific attributes in your HyperMesh session.
5. Click return.
To define the material properties and element thickness:
The model you imported has two component collectors without any materials. In this step, create a
material collector and assign it to your component collectors.

3. Click the switch after collector type: and select mats.
4. Click name = and enter plastic.
This loads the MAT1 card image for the material plastic.
static analysis is required. Density values are required, however, for normal modes
analysis.
8. Click the data entry field under E and enter 1137Mpa.

10. Click A, click the data entry field under A, and enter 81E-6mm/mm/C.
A is the coefficient of linear thermal expansion.
11. Click return.

12. Select the switch after collector type: and select comps.
13. Select the card image subpanel.
14. Double-click name = and select shells (PSHELL).
15. Click edit.
16. Make sure the value of T is 2.5. If it is not, click T, click the data entry field under T, and enter
2.5.
17. Click return.

18. Double-click name = and select shells_nondesign (PSHELL.1).
19. Click edit.
20. Click T, click the data entry field under T, and enter 2.5.
21. Click return.
OptiStruct stores information regarding shell thickness on the PSHELL card in the T block.
Notice that both components have MID’s of 0.
To assign a material collector to each component:

4. Click comps and select shells and shells_nondesign.
5. Click select.
6. Click material = and select plastic.
7. Click update and select material id.
8. Click update.
At this point, check your component collector PSHELL cards again to ensure that the MIDs are now
set to 1.

2. Double-click name = and enter shells.
3. Click edit.
Check that the MIDs are set to 1.
4. Click return.
5. Double-click name = and select shells_nondesign.
6. Click edit.
7. Click return.

To apply boundary conditions to the model:
In this section, the model is constrained opposite the spout to simulate two hinges. Two constraints
are applied at the corners of the spout so that the nodes do not move vertically.

4. Click name = and enter constraints.
6. Click create.
To create constraints at the corners of the spout:

2. Click loadcol and select constraints.
3. Click return.
6. Select the two nodes at the corners of the spout, as shown in the figure below.
Select these nodes to create constraints at the spout corners
7. Click dof3 to constrain it, if not already selected.

8. Click size = and enter 1 for the constraint size.
Dofs 1, 2, and 3 are x, y, and z translation degrees of freedom
Dofs 4, 5, and 6 are x, y, and z rotational degrees of freedom
9. Select create to constrain the selected nodes.


To create constraints opposite the spout:
1. Select the create nodes panel on the geom page.

3. Click the data entry field after x = and enter 0.0.
4. Click the data entry field after y = and enter -10.0.
5. Click the data entry field after z = and enter 0.0.
6. Click create node.
The node is created at the centerline of the coffee lid.
7. Click return.
9. Pick the nodes as shown in the figure below.
Create constraints opposite the spout to model hinges
10. Click dof1, dof2, and dof3 if not already selected.

11. Click create.
Four constraints are created.
12. Click return.
13. Select the temp nodes panel on the Tool page.
14. Click clear all to remove the temp node.
15. Click return.
The last step in setting up the boundary conditions is to create an OptiStruct subcase (a load
step in HyperMesh).

2. Click name = and enter brew cycle.
3. Click loadcols and select constraints and THERMAL_LOADING from the collector list.
4. Click select.
5. Click create.
6. Click return.

Submitting the job
To write your file:

3. Click template = and enter optistruct/optistruct. Or, click template = again and select
the optistruct template file in the optistruct directory.
4. Click filename = and enter lid_complete.fem.
5. Click write.
6. Click return.
To run OptiStruct:

2. Select the switch and select OPTISTRUCT.
need to edit this field.
3. Click input file = and enter the OptiStruct input deck lid_complete.fem. Or, click input file =
again and browse your directory structure for the file.
upon the number of grids in your model. As a starting point, use 8MB/1000 grids or nodes. You
can perform a test that allows Optistruct to calculate a recommended amount of RAM for your
model.
5. Click solve.
This launches the Optistruct job. If the job is successful, new results files are created in the
directory from which HyperMesh is run. The lid_complete.out file contains error messages
that can help you debug your input deck if necessary.
6. Click return.
The default files that are written to your directory are:
Lid_complete.res The HyperMesh binary results file.
Lid_complete.HM.ent.cmf A HyperMesh command file used to organize elements

into entity sets based on their density result values (only
used with OptiStruct topology optimization runs).
Lid_complete.HM.comp.cmf A HyperMesh command file used to organize elements

into components based on their density result values
(only used with OptiStruct topology optimization runs).
Lid_complete.out The OptiStruct output file containing specific information

on the file set-up, the set-up of the optimization problem,
an estimate for the amount of RAM and disk space
required for the run, information for each optimization
iteration, and computation time information. Review this

file for warnings and errors that are flagged from
processing the lid_complete.fem file.
Lid_complete.oslog The OptiStruct log file containing compliance and volume

Viewing the results

OptiStruct generates displacement and von Mises stress results for your linear static analysis. This
section describes how to view those results in HyperMesh.
To load the HyperMesh binary results file:
1. Select the files panel on any main menu page in HyperMesh.

3. Click results = and enter lid_complete.res. Or, click results = a second time and browse
your directory structure for the file.
4. Click return.

2. Click simulation =.
3. Click brew_cycle.
4. Select datatype = displacements.
6. Click deform to view a deformed plot of your model overlaid on the original undeformed mesh
7. Click return.
Deformed shape with overlay of displacement contour

1. Select the contour panel on the Post.

2. Click simulation = and select SUBCASE 1 -ITERATION 0.
3. Click data type = and select Displacements.
There are three data types available: displacements, von Mises stress, and density. The
density data type is used only with topology optimization results and is not used in this procedure.
4. Click contour.
5. Click data type = and select von Mises stress.
6. Click assign.
7. Click return.
Normal Modes Analysis of a Splash Shield

In this tutorial, apply boundary conditions and perform a normal modes analysis of the problem using
an existing finite element model of an automotive splash shield. Use the post-processing tools in
HyperMesh to determine mode shapes of the model.
Before importing the model for this tutorial, you must delete the current model from HyperMesh.
To delete the current model:

3. Click yes to delete the current model.
Deleting the current model clears the current HyperMesh database. Information stored in .hm
files on your disk is not affected.
4. Click return.

4. Select the optistruct.exe input translator. The OptiStruct input translator allows you to retrieve
model information stored in an OptiStruct ASCII .fem file.
5. Double-click filename = and select the file sshield.fem, located in the HyperWorks installation
directory under /tutorials/hm/.
6. Click import.

To define your OptiStruct template:

3. Select the optistruct template file in the optistruct directory. The OptiStruct template
allows you to define OptiStruct specific attributes in your HyperMesh session.
4. Click return.
The model contains two rigid spiders where the shield is bolted down. This represents the interaction
between the bolts and the shield. It is assumed that the bolts are significantly more rigid than the
shield.
The dependent nodes of the rigid elements have six degrees of freedom constrained. Each spider
connects the nodes of the shell mesh together so that they do not move with respect to each other.
To review the rigid elements:
1. Select the rigids panel on the 1-D page.

2. Click review.
3. Select a rigid element from the graphics area.
HyperMesh labels the independent node, the dependent node, and the IDs of the two nodes and
the rigid element. HyperMesh also shows the constrained degrees of freedom in the rigids panel
for the rigid element you selected. All rigid elements in this model should have dof1 - dof6
constrained.
4. Click return.
To define the material properties:
The model has two component collectors without any materials. In this step, create a material
collector and assign it to your component collectors. The rigid elements do not need to be assigned
to a material.

3. Click the switch after collector type: and select mats.
This loads the MAT1 card image for the material steel.
static analysis is requried. Density values are required, however, for normal modes
analysis.
8. Click the data entry field under E and enter 2.0E5MPa.


10. Click RHO, click the data entry field under RHO, and enter 7.85E-9Mg/mm^3.
For this tutorial, it is necessary to define a density value since you will be running a normal modes
solution.
11. Click return.
To assign a thickness to your shell elements:

3. Double-click name = and select shell, the component containing your shell elements.
4. Click edit.
5. Click T, click the data entry field below T, and enter 0.25 as the thickness of your component.
6. Click return.
To assign the steel material collector to a component:

2. Click the switch after the collector type: and select comps.
3. Click comps and select shell.
4. Click select.
6. Click update and select material id.
7. Click update again.
At this point, check your component collector PSHELL cards again to ensure that the MIDs are
now set to 1.
9. Double-click name = and select shells.
10. Click edit.
11. Click return.
To apply boundary conditions to the model:
In this section, the model is constrained at the bolt locations.

4. Click name = and enter constraints.

6. Click create.
In the previous tutorials, multiple load collectors were created and grouped together in the load
steps panel to form an OptiStruct subcase. For example, the constraints load collector and a
forces load collector. Both of these boundary conditions were used together in one load step.
In this tutorial, constrain the model using SPC’s at the bolt locations. Those constrains are
organized into the load collector constraints. Designate the analysis as normal modes. To
designate the subcase, put a load collector with the EIGRL card image into the subcase (or load
step).
8. Click name = and enter frequencies.
10. Click card image = and select EIGRL.
To set up the EIGRL card:
Extract the first six roots between 0 and 200 Hz.

1. Click V1, click the data entry field under V1, and enter 0 for the lower bound of the frequency
range.
2. Click V2, click the data entry field under V2, and enter 200.
3. Click ND, click the data entry field under ND, and enter 6 for the number of roots.
4. Click return.
To create constraints at the bolt locations:

2. Click loadcol and select constraints.
3. Click return.
5. Select the two nodes as shown in the figure below.
6. Select the view panel on the permanent menu and click top.

Select these nodes to constrain the bolt locations (top view)
7. Click dof1 - dof6, if not already selected.

8. Click create to constrain the selected nodes.

9. Click return.
The last step in setting up the boundary conditions is to create an OptiStruct subcase (a load
step in HyperMesh).

2. Click name = and enter bolted.
3. Click loadcols and select constraints and frequencies.
4. Click select.
5. Click create.
6. Click return.

Submitting the job
To write your file:
1. Select the files panel from any main menu page.

3. Click template = and enter optistruct/optistruct. Or, click template = again and select
the optistruct template file in the optistruct directory.
4. Click filename = and enter sshield_complete.fem.
5. Click write.
This writes your HyperMesh database as an OptiStruct ASCII input deck.
6. Click return.
To run OptiStruct:
1. Select the solver panel on the BCs page in HyperMesh.

2. Click the switch and select OPTISTRUCT.
need to edit this field at this time.
3. Click input file = and enter the OptiStruct input deck sshield_complete.fem. Or, click input
file = again and browse your directory structure for the file.
upon the number of grids in your model. As a starting point, use 8MB/1000 grids. You can
perform a test that allows Optistruct to calculate a recommended amount of RAM for your model.
5. Click solve.
This starts the Optistruct job. If the job is successful, new results files are created in the directory
from which HyperMesh is run. The sshield_complete.out file contains error messages that
can help you debug your input deck if necessary.
6. Click return.
The average time between starting the analysis and completing the job is 30 seconds. Performance
depends upon your processor, available RAM, and the time required for system communications.
The default files that are written to your directory are:
sshield_complete.res The HyperMesh binary results file.
sshield_complete.HM.ent.cmf A HyperMesh command file used to organize

elements into entity sets based on their density result
values (only used with OptiStruct topology
optimization runs).
sshield_complete.HM.comp.cmf A HyperMesh command file used to organize

elements into components based on their density
result values (only used with OptiStruct topology
optimization runs).
sshield_complete.out The OptiStruct output file containing specific

information on the file set-up, the set-up of your

optimization problem, an estimate for the amount of
RAM, and disk space required for the run, information
for each optimization iteration, and computation time
information. Review this file for warnings and errors
that are flagged from processing the
sshield_complete.fem file.
sshield_complete.oslog The OptiStruct log file containing compliance and

volume calculations for each optimization iteration.
Viewing the results

OptiStruct generates Eigenvector results for your normal modes analysis. This section describes
how to view your results in HyperMesh.

3. Click results file= and enter sshield_complete.res. Or, click results = a second time and
browse your directory structure for the file.
4. Click return.

There are seven simulations:
DENSITY - ITER 0
MODE 1-F#.##E+##-ITER 0
If you are running a normal modes analysis only, the DENSITY simulation can be ignored.
Simulations containing the word “MODE and numbers contain the results from your analysis.
The frequency values for the six roots that OptiStruct extracted are:
MODE 1 = Hz.
MODE 2 = Hz.
MODE 3 = Hz.
MODE 4 = Hz.
MODE 5 = Hz.
MODE 6 = Hz.
3. Select the simulation for MODE 1.

4. Click model units = enter 15.
5. Click modal to view an animation of the mode shape at the first frequency.
For modal solutions, make sure that the nodes that are constrained are not moving.
6. View the rest of your mode shapes using the same model units.
When you select MODE 5, how does your model compare with the figure below?
Mode shape of 5th root, 287Hz.
Analysis Review
• In this analysis, it was assumed that the bolts were significantly stiffer than the shield. If the
bolts needed to be made of aluminum and the shield was still made of steel, would you need to
modify your model and run the analysis again?
• It is necessary to push the natural frequencies of the splash shield above 50Hz. With the
current model, you should have one mode that violates this constraint: MODE 1, 43Hz. Design
specifications allow the inner disjointed circular rib to be modified such that no significant mass
is added to the part. The available package space for this new rib is shown as the solid region
in the figure below. The thickness of the solid region is equal to the depth of the original rib. Is
there a better configuration for this rib within the above stated constraints that will push the first
mode above 50Hz? (see the OptiStruct tutorial OS-3001 to redesign this part)
Yellow, solid region represents the available package space for redesigning the inner disjointed circular rib.

Deformed and Contour Plotting - HM-610
This tutorial introduces the deformed and contour panels, which are used for post-processing and
viewing finite element analysis (FEA) results files. Additional viewing options are available on these
panels if you use the performance graphics engine.
contour panel Allows you to create contour and assigned plots of your model. Use
this function to see your results graphically, in either a contour or
assigned plot mode.
deformed panel The deformed panel plots displacement analysis results. Use this
function to see the motion of your structure after analysis.
• Creating a Contour Plot

• Creating an Assign Plot
• Cutting planes using the contour panel
• Isosurface plotting in performance graphics mode using the contour panel
• Plotting a structure using the deformed panel
• Creating a linear animation sequence
• Creating a modal animation sequence
administrator.
Creating a Contour Plot

In the following tutorial, use the contour panel to view results from a structural analysis. The results
are represented by color-coding the model, such that each color represents the different engineering
values of each section of the structure.

/tutorials/hm/.
bumper.hm file.

6. Click retrieve.
The bumper.hm file
To retrieve the analysis results file:
1. Select the files panel from the main menu.

2. Click the results subpanel
4. Select the bumper.res file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under
/tutorials/hm/.
5. Click return.
To create and display a contour plot using the analysis results file:

2. Click simulation = and select NEAR CENTER HIT-LINE LOAD.
4. Click title = and enter This is the title for the contour plot.

5. Click contour.
The contoured plot is displayed. The legend, which identifies the values associated with the color
bars, is displayed in the top left corner of the graphics area. The title of the plot is also displayed.
Contour plot of the file bumper.hm
To attach titles to the entities with the least and greatest results values:
1. Click min/max titles.

2. Click contour.
For contour plots, the titles are attached to nodes in the graphics area.
To use the info title function:
1. Click info title.

2. Click contour.
A new title box, displayed in the top left corner of the graphics area, describes features of the
displayed results.

To display a full size screen plot:
1. Click full size.

2. Click contour.
The main menu is removed and a full size screen plot is displayed.
3. To return to the main menu, click a mouse button.
To change the color of the mesh lines:
1. Click mesh color and select Color 12.

2. Click contour.
The mesh lines are yellow.
To change the displacement component:
1. Click the switch next to total disp and select y comp.

The vector component of displacement is used to calculate contours.
By default, the total displacement (total disp) of the node is used as the value in the contour, if
displacements are being used to calculate contours.
2. Click contour.
To select a deformed type for the model:
The default mode of the assigned plot is undeformed. You can deform a model by selecting model
units or scale factor.
1. Click the lower left switch next to undeformed and select scale factor.
2. Click scale factor = and enter 100.0.
3. Click contour.
The model is deformed.

Contour plot, deformed shape of bumper.hm
To change the scale factor:
1. Click mult = and enter 10.000.
2. Click contour.
The engineering values in the results file are changed to reflect this factor. The shape of the
model changes as well.
To redefine a minimum contour value:
By default, values assigned to the colors in the legend are calculated by taking the maximum analysis
value found in the results file and the minimum value found in the results file and dividing the range of
these values by the number of colors used in the plot.
1. Click the lower left toggle next to find minimum and select minimum =.
2. Click minimum = and enter 0.000.
This value is assigned to the lowest color in the plot.
3. Click contour.
To redefine a maximum contour value:
1. Click the upper left toggle next to find maximum and select maximum =.
2. Click maximum = and enter 0.01.
This value is assigned to the highest color in the plot.
3. Click contour.

To change the display mode of the contour plot:

A pop-up menu of the display options is displayed.
2. Click the toggle next to mode and switch between hidden line and wireframe.
The model is displayed in hidden line and wireframe mode.
3. Click the toggle next to color and switch between by element and contour.
The color display of the model changes to reflect your selection.
4. Click the toggle next to mesh and switch between mesh, features, and none.
This changes the plotting of the meshed lines.
To create a cutting plane through the model:
1. Click visual options and select cutting plane.

HyperMesh goes to the cutting planes subpanel.
3. Pick three nodes on the model.
These nodes define the cutting plane direction.
4. Pick a base node on the model.
The model will be cut at that node.
5. Select cut plane.
The model is cut.

Contour plot of bumper.hm using a cutting plane
6. Click reverse plane.

The reverse of the model is removed from view.
7. Click translate +.
The cutting plane is moved 10.000 positive units forward in the direction normal to the plane
defined by the three nodes that you selected.
8. Select translate -.
The cutting plane is moved 10.000 negative units in the direction normal to the plane defined by
the three nodes you selected.
9. Click clear plane to remove the section cut.
You can now define a new plane cut, if necessary.

Creating an Assign Plot
In the following tutorial, use the contour panel along with the assign plot function to view results from
a structural analysis. The results are represented by color coding the model, such that the each color
represents the different engineering values of each section of the structure.

/tutorials/hm/.
bumper.hm file.
6. Click retrieve.
The bumper.hm file

1. Select the file panel from the main menu.

/tutorials/hm/.
5. Click return.
To create and display an assign plot using the analysis results file:

4. Click title = and enter This is the title for the assign plot.
5. Click assign.
The assigned plot is displayed. The legend, which identifies the values associated with the color
bars, is displayed in the top left corner of the graphics area. The title of the plot is also displayed.
The assign function assigns a color to each element in the model, based on the values in the
results file. The elements are then displayed in the solid color assigned to them.
Assign plot of the bumper.hm file


2. Click assign.
For assigned plots, the titles are attached to the elements.

2. Click assign.
A new title box, displayed in the top left corner of the graphics area, describes some features of
the displayed results.
1. Click full size.

2. Click assign.
To change the color of the mesh lines:

2. Click assign.
1. Click total disp and select y comp.

By default, the total displacement (total disp) of the node is used as the value in the assignment,
if displacements are being used to calculate assignments.
2. Click assign.
1. Click the lower left switch next to undeformed and select scale factor.
3. Click assign.


2. Click assign.
1. Click the lower left toggle next to find minimum and select minimum =.
3. Click assign.
3. Click assign.
To change the display mode of the contour plot:

A pop-up menu is displayed.
2. Click the toggle next to mode and switch between hidden line and wireframe.
The model is displayed in hidden line and wireframe mode.
3. Click the toggle next to color and switch between by element and contour.
The color display of the model changes to reflect your selection.
4. Click the toggle next to mesh and switch between mesh, features, and none.
This changes the plotting of the meshed lines.
To create a cutting plane through the model:
1. Click visual options and select cutting plane.

3. Pick three nodes on the model.
These nodes define the cutting plane direction.
4. Pick a base node on the model.
The section cut will be made here.
5. Select cut plane.
The model is cut.

6. Click reverse plane.
The reverse of the model is removed from view.
The cutting plane is moved 10.000 positive units forward in the direction normal to the plane
defined by the three nodes that you selected.
8. Click translate -.
The cutting plane is moved 10.000 negative units in the direction normal to the plane defined by
the three nodes that you selected.
9. Click clear plane to remove the section cut.
You can now define a new plane cut, if necessary.
Cutting Planes using the Contour Panel

In the following tutorial, use the performance graphics engine, the contour panel, and the cutting
plane function to create a sectioned result plot of the structural analysis results.

/tutorials/hm/.
bumper.hm file.
6. Click retrieve.

The bumper.hm file.

2. Select results and file = twice.
/tutorials/hm/.
4. Click return.
To switch to the performance graphics mode:

3. Click the toggle after engine: to performance.
4. Click return.

To change the display in the graphics area:
2. Select the following icons: and .

3. Click all.
4. Click return.
The performance graphics engine treats each HyperMesh component as an independent unit.
This feature allows you to assign a set of display attributes to each component of your model that
determine how each component is displayed. For more information on the display attributes that
you can assign to each component, see the topic Component Display in Performance Graphics in
the HyperMesh User’s Guide.
To create and display a contour plot:

2. Select the params subpanel.
3. Click simulation = and select NEAR CENTER HIT-DISTR LOAD.
5. Click title = and enter This is the performance graphics contour plot.
6. Click the toggle and select visual panel.
7. Click contour.

2. Click contour.
For contour plots, the titles are attached to nodes in the graphics area.

2. Click contour.
A new title box, displayed in the top left corner of the graphics area, describes some features of
the displayed results.
1. Click full size.

2. Click contour.

To change the color of the mesh:

2. Click contour.
1. Click the switch next to magnitude and select y comp.

By default, the total displacement (magnitude) of the node is used as the value in the contour if
displacements are being used to calculate contours.
2. Click contour.
1. Click the lower center switch next to undeformed and select scale factor.
3. Click contour.

2. Click contour.
1. Select the legend subpanel.

2. Click the lower center toggle and select minimum =.
4. Click contour.

1. Select the legend subpanel.

4. Click contour.
To create a cutting plane on the model:
1. Select the cutting subpanel.

2. Click xy plane and trim planes.
3. Click the upper right toggle next to single and select double.
4. Click t = and enter 25.000.
In the performance graphics engine, the cutting plane function allows three planes to be active
simultaneously. A cutting plane can be moved through the model by selecting the active plane with
the mouse and then dragging it across the model.
xy cutting plane contour plot of bumper.hm

Using the Deformed Panel to Plot a Structure
In the following tutorial, use the deformed panel to view structural analysis results. The results are
represented as static deformed plots, linear animation, or modal animation. You have the option to
color code the model, so that different colors represent different engineering values relating to each
section of the structure.

/tutorials/hm/.
bumper.hm file.
6. Click retrieve.
The bumper.hm file.


2. Select results, click file = twice.
/tutorials/hm/.
4. Click return.
To switch from performance graphics mode to standard mode:
1. Select the options panel from the permanent menu.

3. Click the toggle next to engine: and select standard, if not already displayed.
To create and display a deformed plot using the analysis results file:

4. Click title = and enter This is the title for the deformed plot.
5. Click the leftmost toggle and select model units.
6. Click model units = and enter 45.0.
The node(s) with the maximum displacement in the model is displayed as if it had the value
entered in the model units = field. For example, if the maximum displacement was .001 units,
the node would be displaced as if its displacement were 45.0 units. All other displacements
would be interpolated from that point.
7. Click the switch next to undef color and select as selected.
8. Click undef color and select a color from the pop-up window.
The as selected option allows you to select a constant color for all the elements in the structure.
The use elem color option colors the elements in the structure the same color as the element.
The use background option colors the structure the same color as your background..
9. Click the switch next to deform color and select use elem color.
10. Click deform.
The deformed and undeformed shapes are displayed in the wireframe mode.
11. Click visual options to change the display mode of the model.
Note: Any change made to the visual options causes the undeformed shape to be removed
from the display.

Deformed and undeformed wireframe plot of bumper.hm
1. Click full size.

2. Click deform.
To create a linear animation using the analysis results file:
1. Retain the settings from the procedures above.

2. Click frames = and enter 6.
This sets the number of frames of animation to be displayed.
3. Click linear.
HyperMesh calculates the animation frames and displays them. Each frame is a linear
interpolation of the maximum displacement for each node.
During animation, the visual controls in the permanent menu can be used to manipulate the view.
The visual options can be used to manipulate the display.
4. Click exit to stop the animation.

Creating a Modal Animation Sequence

4. Select the rotor.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under
/tutorials/hm/.
5. HyperMesh returns to the files panel. Note that file = now displays the location of the rotor.hm
file.
6. Click retrieve.
The rotor.hm model

2. Select results, click file = twice.
3. Select the rotor.res file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under
/tutorials/hm/.
4. Click return.
To create a modal animation using the analysis results file:

2. Click model units = and enter 30.00.
3. Click frames = and enter 6.
4. Click modal.
HyperMesh calculates the animation frames and displays them. Each frame is a linear
interpolation of the maximum displacement for each node.
Modal animations are calculated and displayed in HyperMesh such that the shape is shown in its
positive and negative form. All the visual options, as well as view manipulation, can be used
during animation.
5. Click exit to stop the animation

HyperMesh 4.0 Post-Processing Features - HM-620
In this tutorial, use the transient panel and the performance graphics mode to learn about the
HyperMesh 3.0 post processing features. These features allow you to create bitmap animations and
AVI animation files, display discrete contours in the performance graphics mode, replay previously
saved files, edit legends, and create EPS files.

• Using the Post-Processing Features on the options and transient panels
administrator.
Using the Post-Processing Features on the options and

transient panels

4. Select the treb.hm30 file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under
/tutorials/hm/.
treb.hm30 file.
6. Click retrieve.

3. Click results file = twice.
4. Select the treb.res file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under
/tutorials/hm/.

To change from the standard to performance graphics mode:
1. Select the options panel on permanent menu.

3. Click the toggle after engine: and select performance.
Perform the following procedures in performance graphics mode:
To specify a bitmap animation preference:
• Click the switch after bitmap animation: and select simple.
To change the AVI window size:
• Click the switch after AVI Options and select ¼ screen.
To change the result color type - performance graphics mode:
1. Click the toggle after result color type: and select discrete contours.
Discrete contours produces discrete color bands on contour plots with distinct boundaries
between contour levels.
2. Click return to exit the options panel.
Use the transient panel to perform the following procedures:
To create an animation sequence from transient results:
1. Select the transient panel on the Post page.

2. Click start with =.
HyperMesh displays a list of the available simulations.
3. Select Time step 0, t = 0.000e+00 to be used as the starting point for calculating the deformed
shape of the structure.
4. Click end with =.
5. Select Time step 26, t = 2.500e+00 as the last simulation to be used.
6. Click data type =.
7. Select Vonmises (mid) as the data type used to calculate the deformed shape of the structure.
8. Click the toggle before find maximum and select maximum =.
9. Click maximum = and enter 2000 as the maximum data type value on the contour plot.
10. Click transient.
In the header bar, the message “Some element results not found (ignored) is displayed. This
message occurs because rigid links and joints are displayed in the graphics area. HyperMesh
does not support results for these entities.
HyperMesh goes to the animation panel.

11. Click the leftmost toggle and select visual options.
12. Click the toggle after mode and select hidden line.
13. Click the toggle after color and select contour.
To create a replay file:
1. Click create replay.

2. Click return to exit the animation panel and return to the transient panel.
To reverse the legend data type values:
1. Click the legend in graphics area to activate the legend edit panel.
2. Click reverse legend.
3. Click return to exit the legend edit panel.
HyperMesh returns to the transient panel.
4. Click transient.
doesn’t support results for these entities.
HyperMesh returns to the animation panel, the bitmap frames are built, and the animation
begins.
5. Click return to exit animation panel.
HyperMesh returns to the transient panel.
To turn off the legend and simulation titles:
1. Click w on the permanent menu.

2. Click display legend to make this option inactive.
3. Click display simulation title to make this option inactive.
4. Click return to exit the w panel.
5. Click transient.
doesn’t support results for these entities.
To create an AVI file:
1. Click make AVI.

The file is generated and saved in your specified user directory with a file extension of .AVI. The
file is the size specified under AVI Options in the options panel. File names are automatically
incremented when you create multiple AVI files. You can insert AVI files into Microsoft Word or
PowerPoint files.
2. Click return to exit the animation panel.
3. Click return to exit the transient panel.

Fatigue Panel - HM-630L
This tutorial demonstrates how to write an input file for a given fatigue solver using the options
available on the fatigue panel.
• Using the fatigue panel to export data and write an nSOFT input deck
See Also
fatigue panel
Interfacing with nSOFT
Using the Fatigue Panel to Export Data and Write an

nSOFT Input Deck
In this tutorial, retrieve the file keyhole.hm. This file contains a finite element (FE) model -for which
an analysis has already been conducted- to obtain the stress/strain information for durability loads of
interest.

4. Select the keyhole.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under
/tutorials/hm/.
keyhole.hm file.
6. Click retrieve.
3. Select the keyhole.res file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under
/tutorials/hm/.
4. Click return.

To export data and write a fatigue solver input deck:
1. Select the fatigue panel on the Post page.
2. Click the upper left toggle and select static/modal.

Results contained in keyhole.res were obtained from linear statics analysis.
Note: Select the transient dynamic option if a dynamic finite element analysis was
used to obtain the stress/strain results for the model.
3. Click the lower left toggle and select ascii.
Note: Select the binary option if the fatigue solver allows a binary input file.
For more information on fatigue solvers and acceptable input file formats,
please see the fatigue panel in the Panels On-line Help.
4. Click output file = and enter a name for the output file.
This file becomes the input file for the fatigue solver.
5. Click data group = and select any of the data groups that you want to write to the output file.
The data groups are organized based on whether nodal or elemental results are available in the
results file.
Note: For more information on how HyperMesh organizes the analysis results available
in the results file, please see the fatigue panel in the Panels On-line Help.
6. Click the switch under select simulation: and select all.

This specifies the data in the results file that is written to the output file. In this case, selecting all
writes the stress/strain data for the selected nodes or elements for all loadcases represented in
keyhole.res.
Note: For a static/modal analysis, you can write out stress/strain information from one
or all of the simulations.
For a transient dynamic analysis, you can write out stress/strain information for
one or all of the time steps, or you can choose a range from the starting time step
to the ending time step.
For more information, see the fatigue panel in the Panels On-line Help.
The next step is to select the entities for which the finite element analysis results file is written.
Note: The type of entity you select is based upon the data group you selected. Select
nodes if the data group you selected refers to nodal results. Similarly, select
elements if the data group you selected refers to elemental results. If the data
group results and the entity type are not the same, HyperMesh displays an error
message, “Results file doesn’t contain nodal values.
7. Click the entity input collector switch and select elems.

8. Click elems and select by window from the extended entity selection menu.
9. Draw the window as shown in the figure below.
10. Click interior.

12. Click write.
An ascii file is written to your directory.
You can read this file into the appropriate fatigue solver to complete the fatigue analysis.

Building and Annotating Plots - HM-700
This tutorial introduces the panels used to build and annotate plots and curves.

• Using the results curves panel
• Using the plots panel
• Using the query curves panel
• Using the curve attribs panel
• Using the axis scaling panel
• Using the axis labels panel
• Using the grid attribs panel
• Using the grid labels panel
• Using the legend panel
• Using the border panel
• Using the plot titles panel
• Exporting curve data with the simple math panel
• Using the read curves panel
administrator.
See Also
HyperMesh Panels On-line Help for more information on building and annotating plots
Using the results curves panel

The results curves panel allows you to create curves by extracting data from a HyperMesh results
file.
The along nodes and position subpanels allow you to create a contour plot of the model. Then, the
panels allow you to select nodes along a path or select nodes that are then used in the order in which
they occur along a specified axis.
In this tutorial, create plots with curves using the data from a HyperMesh binary results file and the
results, along nodes, position, and along cut subpanels.


4. Select the raildemo.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under
/tutorials/hm/.
raildemo.hm file.
6. Click retrieve.
To specify a HyperMesh binary results file:

3. Click results file = twice.
4. Select the raildemo.res file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under
/tutorials/hm/.
5. HyperMesh returns to the files panel. Note that results = now displays the location of the
raildemo.res file.
6. Click return.
To create a plot and curves using the results subpanel:
1. Select the xy plots module on the Post page.

2. Select the results curves panel.
4. Click the upper switch and select create new plot.
5. Click x data type = and select time.
6. Click y data type = and select Displacements.
7. Click start with = and select Rail Crash, t = 0.29959E-03.
8. Click end with = and select Rail Crash, t = 0.12000E-01.
9. Click the lower input collector switch and select nodes.
10. Pick three nodes on the model in the graphics area. Pick a node near each end and one node in
the center of the model.
11. Click create.
Three displacements vs. time curves are created on a standard plot. The plot is located in the
upper left corner of the graphics area. The name of the plot, untitled1, is displayed in the
create new plot data entry field.

To create a plot and a curve using the along nodes subpanel:

3. Select the along nodes subpanel.
4. Click simulation = and select Rail Crash, t = 0.12000E-01.
5. Click contour.
A contour plot of total displacements is created.
6. Pick 14 nodes on the model so that the nodes define a path. Pick the nodes across the different
contour colors where the model curves.
Note: The order in which the nodes are picked determines the connectivity of the
data points on the curve being created.
7. Click plot list.
A Displacements vs. Distance Along Node Path curve is created on a standard plot named
untitled2. HyperMesh names the curve curve8. The plot is located in the lower right corner
of the graphics area. The name of the plot is displayed in the create new plot data entry field.
To create a plot and a curve using the position subpanel:

3. Select the position subpanel.
4. Click the switch after axis: and select x axis.
5. Click contour.
A contour plot of total displacements along the x-axis is created.
6. Pick 14 nodes on the model so that the nodes define a path. Pick the nodes across the different
contour colors where the model curves.
7. Click plot axis.
A Displacements vs. Distance Along X Axis curve is created on a standard plot named
untitled3. HyperMesh names the curve curve9. The plot is located in the lower right corner
of the graphics area. The name of the plot is displayed in the create new plot data entry field.
Note: Complex data can also be plotted for shell elements using the results,
along nodes, and position subpanels on the results curve panel. For more
information, see the HyperMesh 4.0 Update Training document.
To reposition a plot on the screen:

2. Click move.
3. Hold down the mouse button and drag the plot containing curve 9 to the upper right corner of the
graphics area.
4. Click p on the permanent menu to refresh the screen.
5. Click move.

6. Hold down the mouse button and drag the plot containing curve 8 to the upper middle section of
the graphics area.
7. Click p.
8. Click return.
To create a plot and a curve using the along cut subpanel:

3. Select the along cut subpanel.
Note: If the along cut subpanel is not visible, switch from the performance to
standard graphics mode. If it is visible, go to step 4.
To switch from performance to standard graphics mode:
- Click return.
- Select the options panel on the permanent menu.
- Select the graphics subpanel.
- Click the toggle and select standard.
- Click return.
- Select the results curves panel on the xy plots module.
- Select the along cut subpanel.
4. Click simulation = and select Rail Crash, t = 0.12000E-01.
5. Click contour.
A contour plot of total displacements is created.
6. Click the plane and vector collector switch and select N1 N2 N3.
7. Click edit.
8. Click x = under N1 and enter 539.054.
In the Node Vector Edit panel, x =, y =, z = data entry fields are displayed under N1, N2, N3,
and base.
9. Click y = under N1 and enter 15.000.
10. Click z = under N1 and enter 53.749.
11. Click x = under N2 and enter 525.688.
12. Click y = under N2 and enter 15.000.
13. Click z = under N2 and enter 40.833.
14. Click return.
A purple circle in the graphics area indicates the base node location.
15. Click cut plane.
16. Click plot cut.
A Displacements vs. Distance Along Cut curve is created for the nodes that are on the cut plane.
HyperMesh names the curve curve10. curve10 is located on the standard plot in the lower
right corner of the graphics area. The name of the standard plot, untitled4, is displayed in the
create new plot data entry field.

17. Click return.
18. Click exit.
To rename a plot:
1. Select the rename panel on the Post page.

2. Click the switch and select plots.
3. Click collector = and select untitled1.
4. Click new name = and enter myplot1.
5. Click rename.
In the header bar, the message “The collector was renamed is displayed.
6. Click return.
8. Click the upper switch and select plots.
9. Notice that the plot collector untitled1 is now named myplot1
10. Click return to access the main menu
Using the plots panel

The plots panel is used to create new plots and allows you to select curves to include on the plot.
You can create plots with default attributes or with attributes of an existing plot. In this tutorial, add an
existing curve to a plot, create an entirely new plot, and create a plot with the attributes of an existing
plot.
To display a plot:

2. Click the upper switch and select plots.
3. Click none.
No plots are displayed in the graphics area.
4. Select raildisp and railstrs.
Two plots are displayed in the graphics area.
5. Right-click railstrs.
The railstrs plot is no longer displayed in the graphics area.
7. Click return.

To create an entirely new plot collector:

2. Select the plots panel.
3. Click plot = and enter myplot2.
Click the switch and select standard.
4. Click create plot.
A standard plot is created and is located in the upper left corner of the graphics area on top of the
plot raildisp.
To create an new plot based on default values from an existing plot:
1. Click plot = and enter myplot3.
2. Click like = and select raildisp.

A plot is created with the same attributes as the plot raildisp. The new plot is displayed in the
upper left corner of the graphics area on top of the plots myplot2 and raildisp.
To add a curve to a plot:

2. Click none.
3. Select myplot1 and raildisp.
4. Click return.
5. Reposition the displayed plots:
- Click w on the permanent menu.
- Click push.
- In the header bar, the message “Select a window to push to the background is displayed.
- Select the plot raildisp in the graphics area.
- The plot myplot1 is now on top of the plot raildisp.
- Click return.
6. Double-click plot =.
7. Select myplot1.
8. Click select curves.
9. Select curve 3.
Curves 2, 3, 6, and 7 are selected. Curves, 2, 6, and 7 are displayed on the plot myplot1.
10. Click return.
curve3 is added to the plot myplot1. There are now four curves on the plot myplot1.
11. Click return.

To expand a plot to fill the screen:

2. Click expand.
3. Select the plot myplot1 from the graphics area.
The plot expands to fill the screen.
4. Click return.
Using the query curves panel

The query curves panel allows you to find the x and y values of a point in a curve. You can edit
curve titles displayed in the plot legends as well. In this tutorial, view curve data points.
To view a curve’s data points:
1. Select the query curves panel on the xy plots module.

2. Click plot = and select myplot1.
3. Click curve =.
4. Pick curve3 (the green curve) in the graphics area.
curve = displays curve3. The data entry field following points = displays 40, indicating that
there are 40 XY data points on curve3. The data entry field following title = displays node 705.
Curve3 plots the time step results data for node 705 in the model.
5. Pick curve3 in the graphics area.
A white circle is displayed on the curve. The x-axis and y-axis coordinates for this point are
displayed in their respective data entry fields.
6. Pick other points on curve3.
The coordinates listed in the data entry fields for x = and y = change as you select a new point.
7. Click return.
Using the curve attribs panel

The curve attribs panel allows you to create and edit curves displayed on an xy plot. In this tutorial,
change the curve attributes and add a marker to a curve.
To change curve attributes:
1. Select the curve attribs panel on the xy plots module.

2. Click plot =.
3. Select the plot in the graphics area.
The data entry field following plot = displays myplot1.
4. Click auto color.
A new color is assigned to the curves, which were previously gray.

5. Click curve = and select curve 6.
6. Click the toggle and select thick lines.
The line thickness for curve 6 reflects this change.
7. Click color and select color 6 from the pop-up menu.
The color of curve 6 changes. The legend on myplot1 reflects the change as well.
8. Click the lower switch and select tria marker.
A triangle is displayed at every XY data point on curve6. The legend on myplot1 also displays
this triangle.
9. Click title =.
10. Enter node 625 Disp (total disp) VS time in the data entry field after title =.
11. Press the ENTER key.

In the plot legend, the title description for curve6 reflects this change.
12. Click return.
Using the axis scaling panel

The axis scaling panel allows you to modify plot axes. In this tutorial, increase the number of x-axis
grid lines.
To increase the number of x-axis grid lines:
1. Select the axis scaling panel on the xy plots module.

3. Click x increment = and enter .0005.
On the plot myplot1, grid lines are placed at every increment of .0005 along the x-axis.
4. Click return.
Using the axis labels panel

The axis labels panel allows you to edit the axis label information of the current plot or selected
attributes in a group of plots. In this tutorial, add x and y-axis titles and change their color and font
size.
To add x and y-axis titles:
1. Select the axis labels panel on the xy plots module.

3. Click xaxis title = and enter time.
4. Click yaxis title = and enter Displacements.
Note: When yaxis title = is selected, the x-axis title Time is displayed in the
graphics area.

Note: When color is selected, the axis title Displacements is displayed in the
graphics area.
6. Click the switch and select font 3.
The font size for the x and y-axis titles change.
7. Click return.
Using the grid attribs panel

The grid attribs panel allows you to edit the grid line information contained in a plot. In this tutorial,
change plot grid lines so that they have the grid attributes of an existing plot.
To change the grid lines of a plot to have the grid attributes of an existing plot:
1. Select the grid attribs panel on the xy plots module.

2. Click plot = and select raildisp.
3. The plot raildisp is on top of the plot myplot1.
4. Click plots and select myplot1.
5. Click select.
6. Click update.
7. Select gridcolor, width, line style, and margin.
8. Click update.
The plot myplot1 is updated to have the same grid attributes as the plot raildisp. The plot
raildisp is moved to the background; and only the plot myplot1 is visible in the graphics area.
9. Click return.
Using the grid labels panel

The grid labels panel allows you to edit the grid labels on the x and y axes of a plot. In this tutorial,
edit the grid label format of the plot and specify the level of precision.
To change the grid label format and precision of a plot:
1. Select the grid labels panel on the xy plots module.

3. Click the switch after x: and select exponential.
The x-axis grid label format reflects this change.
4. Click the switch after y: and select exponential.
The y-axis grid label format reflects this change.
5. Click the upper precision = and enter 1.
The x-axis grid label precision reflects this change.
6. Click the lower precision = and enter 1.

The y-axis grid label precision reflects this change.
7. Click return.
Using the legend panel

The legend panel allows you to edit the legend associated with a xy plot.
To move a plot legend:
1. Select the legend panel on the xy plots module.

3. Click move legend.
4. Click the upper left corner of the plot.
The legend of the plot moves to that location.
5. Click return.
Using the border panel

The border panel allows you to edit the border of an xy plot. In this tutorial, change a plot border’s
color and margin.
Note: Changes made to the border of the plot, such as editing the color and line
thickness, are also reflected in the border of the plot legend. Turning off
the border of the plot also turns off the plot legend’s border.
To change the border color and margin of the plot:
1. Select the border panel on the xy plots module.

3. Click border color and select color 13.
The borders of the plot and the legend are outlined with color 13.
4. Click border margin = and enter 0.
The margin between the border of the plot and the plot reflects this change.
5. Click return.

Using the plot titles panel
The plot titles panel allows you to edit plot titles. In this tutorial, add a title to a plot and change the
title’s color and font size.
To add a title to the plot:
1. Select the plot titles panel on the xy plots module.

3. Click title = and enter Displacements vs Time.
The title on the plot myplot1 changes.
4. Click title and select color 6.
The title of the plot changes color.
5. Click the switch under title and select font 4.
The plot title’s font size changes.
6. Try changing the subtitle and label of the plot, and their color and font size.
7. Click return.
Exporting Curve Data with the simple math panel

The simple math panel allows you to perform simple math functions on a curve. In this tutorial,
export curve data.
To export curve data:
1. Select the simple math panel on the xy plots module.

2. Click the switch and select external.
3. Click plot = and select the plot myplot1.
4. Click 1st curve = and select curve3.
5. Click filter = and enter the path name of the copy command for your operating system.
6. If you are using the UNIX version of HyperMesh, enter /bin/cp in the filter = data entry field.
7. If you are using the WindowsNT version of HyperMesh, enter \winnt\systems32\xcopy in
the filter = data entry field.
8. Click params = and enter curve3_data.ascii.
9. Click execute.
A file named curve3_data.ascii is created and saved to the directory from which HyperMesh
is run. This file contains the xy data for curve3. A copy of curve3 is also created in HyperMesh
and is named curve11. curve11 is on the plot myplot1. In the data entry field following target =
is curve11.
Note: If you are using HyperMesh for the PC, a DOS window may appear with the following
message: “Does curve3_data.ascii specify a file name or directory name on the
target <F = file, D = directory)? Type F for file.

10. Click return.
11. Review the curve3_data.ascii file.
- For the UNIX version of HyperMesh, go to the directory from which HyperMesh is run.
- For the PC version of HyperMesh, open the file with a text editor.
- The curve3_data.ascii file contains the xy data for curve3.
12. Return to the current HyperMesh session.
To delete curves and plots:

2. Click delete.
3. Click the switch and select curves.
4. Click curves and select curve8, curve9, curve10, and curve11.
5. Click select.
6. Click delete.
7. In the header bar, the message “4 entities were deleted is displayed.
8. Click the switch and select plots.
9. Click plots and select untitled2, untitled3, untitled4, and m2.
10. Click select. yplot
11. Click delete.
12. In the header bar, the message “4 entities were deleted is displayed.
13. Click return.
Using the read curves panel

The read curves panel allows you to input an xy data set from an ASCII file. In this tutorial, import
the curve data that was exported in the last tutorial.
To input an xy data set:

2. Select the read curves panel.
4. Right-click myplot1 and raildisp.
5. There are no plots displayed in the graphics area.
6. Click myplot3.
7. The plot myplot3 is displayed in the graphics area.
9. Click return.
10. Click plot =.

11. Select the plot in the graphics area.
12. The data entry field after plot = displays myplot3.
14. Select curve3_data.ascii.
15. Click input.
16. The xy data in the curve3_data.ascii file is plotted on the plot myplot3. In the header bar,
the message “Finished reading in curve data is displayed.
17. Click return.

Performing Curve Math - HM-710
This tutorial introduces mathematical functions and operators.
Since each procedure builds on the preceding section, start with the first exercise and continue the
exercises in the following order:
• Using the integral math function
• Using the freq math function
• Using the polyfit math function
• Using the vector subrange extractor
• Using the integrate panel
• Using the simple math panel
administrator.
Using the Integral Math Function

The edit curves panel creates or edits new or existing curves from files or math expressions. The
math expressions can contain functions or operators and curve references. Curve numbers define
the curve references. An example of a curve reference is c4.x, where c is curve, 4 is the curve id,
and x is the vector. In this tutorial, create a curve from a data file, modify the curve, and use the
integral math function to return the indefinite integral of a curve.
To create a curve from a data file:

2. Select the edit curves panel on the xy plots module.
4. Click x =.
5. Select file as the data source.
6. Click file = twice to access the file directories.
7. Select the rcforc.ascii file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under
/tutorials/hm/.
Note that x = displays the location of the rcforc.ascii file as well as Time. type = displays
Time.
8. Click y =.
9. Select file as the data source.
10. Click file = twice to access the file directories.
11. Select the rcforc.ascii file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under
/tutorials/hm/.

12. Click type =.
13. Select Interface Forces.
14. Click req =.
15. Select Master 1.
16. Click comp =.
17. Select Z.
y = displays the location of the rcforc.ascii file as well as Master 1/Z.
18. Click create.
The plot and curve are created. The plot is named untitled, and the curve is named curve1, by
default. plot = displays untitled.
To expand the plot to fill the screen:

2. Click expand.
3. Pick the plot in the graphics area.
The plot fills the screen.
4. Click return.
To edit a curve:
1. Select the modify subpanel on the edit curves panel.

2. Click curve =.
3. Select curve1.
4. Click comp =.
5. Select Y.
6. Click modify.
curve1 reflects the component Y.
7. Click comp =.
8. Select Z.
9. Click modify.
curve1 reflects the component Z.
10. Click return.
11. Click exit.

Use the following procedures to perform integration curve math:
To display curve IDs:

2. Select the legend panel on the xy plots module.
3. Click show ids.
The curve’s ID, 1, is displayed in the plot’s legend.
4. Click return.
To create plots:
1. Select the plots panel on the xy plots module.
2. Click plot = and enter test2.
3. Click the switch and select standard.
A standard plot is created, located in the upper left corner of the screen. This plot is on top of the
plot untitled.
5. Repeat steps 2 - 4 to create four standard plots named test3, test4, test5, and test6.
6. In the graphics area, the four plots are stacked on top of the plot test2. It appears that there are
only two plots displayed in the graphics area (untitled and test2).
7. Click return.
To unstack the plots:

2. Click unstack.
Six plots are displayed in the graphics area.
3. Click return.
To edit curves:
1. Select the edit curves panel on the xy plots module.

3. Select math as the data source.
4. Click plot = and select test2.
5. Click the data entry field after x = and enter cl.x.
6. Click the data entry field after y = and enter integral(c1.x,c1.y).
7. Click create.
Given c1, a curve is created which is the indefinite integral of c1. The curve is named curve2
and is located on the plot test2.

Using Filters
Curves can be passed through an SAE filter. In this tutorial, filter a curve using the edit curves
panel.
To filter a curve:
1. Click plot = on the edit curves panel.

2. Select untitled.
x = displays c1.x.
3. Click the data entry field after y = and enter saefilter(c1.x,c1.y,180).
4. Click create.
A third curve, curve3, is created on the same plot as curve1.
Note: For a description of the SAE class filter saefilter and other math functions and
operators, see the topic List of Functions and Operators in the Math Reference chapter.
Using the Freq Math Function

The freq function builds a frequency vector from time-domain data.
To build a frequency domain curve:

2. Select test3.
3. Click the data entry field after x = and enter freq(c1.x).
4. Click the data entry field after y = and enter fftmag(c1.y).
5. Click create.
Given c1, a curve is created which is the amplitude spectrum of the FFT of c1. The curve is
named curve4 and is located on the plot test3.
6. Click return.
7. Click axis scaling on the xy plots module.
plot = displays test3.
8. Click the rightmost switch and select y: logarithmic.
The y-axis scale on the plot test3 changes from linear to logarithmic.
9. Click find curves.
curve4 is displayed on the plot test3.
10. Click return.

Using the Polyfit Math Function
Polynomial and exponential functions can be fit to curves.
To fit a polynomial function to a curve:
1. Click edit curves panel on the xy plots module.

2. Click plot =.
3. Select test4.
4. Click the data entry field after x = and enter c1.x.
5. Click the data entry field after y = and enter polyfit(c1.x,c1.y,8).
6. Click create.
Given c1, curve 5 is created which is an eighth order polynomial fit of curve c1. Curve 5 is
located on the plot test4.
Using the Vector Subrange Extractor

The subrange function returns a vector containing the indices of the elements of a vector for a
specified subrange.
To use the subrange function:

2. Select test5.
3. Click the data entry field after x = and enter c1.x[subrange(c1.x,.01,.04)].
4. Click the data entry field after y = and enter c1.y[subrange(c1.x,.01,.04)].
5. Click create.
Given c1, curve6 is created which is a portion of the original curve, with .01 ≤ X ≤ .04. Curve
6 is located on the plot test5.
6. Click return.
Using the integrate panel

The integrate panel allows you to obtain the area under a curve and a curve’s average height. In this
tutorial, find the area under curve1.
To find the area under a curve:
1. Click the integrate panel on the xy plots module.

2. Click plot =.
3. Pick the plot that contains curve1 and curve3.
4. Click curve = and select curve1.

5. Click the data entry field after to: x and enter 0.05.
6. Click integrate.
In the graphics area, the area under curve1 is shaded. area = displays 5.218, and avg height
= displays 104.366.
7. Click return.
The simple math panel

The simple math panel allows you to apply mathematical operations to curves. In this tutorial,
subtract one curve from another.
To subtract one curve from another:
1. Select the simple math panel on the xy plots module.

2. Click the switch and select sub from the pop-up menu.
3. Click plot = and select test6.
4. Click 1st curve = and select curve1.
5. Click 2nd curve = and select curve3.
6. Click execute.
A curve is created that illustrates the difference between curve1 and curve3. The curve is
named curve7 (displayed in the target = field) and is located on plot test6.

NASTRAN Static Analysis Using HyperMesh - HM-
1010-L
In this tutorial, use the HyperMesh NASTRAN interface to create finite elements on the geometry of a
plate with a hole, apply boundary conditions, and perform finite element analysis.
continue doing the exercises in the following order.

• Defining the Model in HyperMesh
• Writing the NASTRAN Input Deck
• Viewing the Results
administrator.
Defining the Model in HyperMesh

4. Select the plate_hole.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under
/tutorials/hm/.
plate_hole.hm file.
6. Click retrieve.
To retrieve the NASTRAN template for this tutorial:

3. Double click template file =.
4. Select the nastran directory.
5. Select the general template file.
6. HyperMesh returns to the files panel. Note that template file = now displays the location of the
general template.

The NASTRAN general template allows you to define NASTRAN-specific attributes in
HyperMesh.
To create material collectors and components:
Create your material collectors before creating your component collectors; components must
reference a material collector.

3. Select the switch after collector type: and select mats.

The MAT1 card image is loaded for the material steel.
Note: A status title is displayed as yellow (off) or blue (on). The status title
toggles between the two options when you click it.
8. Click the data entry field under E and enter 2E5.
10. Click return.
11. Click the switch after collector type : and select comps.
12. Click name = and enter shells.
HyperMesh goes to the card image panel for the new component, shells. HyperMesh assigns
color 8 to the elements that are organized into this component, and assigns the material steel to
this component.
17. Click T, click the data entry field under T, and enter 10.0.

A component is created named shells. Any elements created and organized into this component
have the thickness attributes defined by the PSHELL card. The elements have material attributes
defined on the MAT1 card by the material collector steel, since the shells component references
this material collector.
Use the card image subpanel to modify the card images for these collectors.
Use the update subpanel to define a different material for the components.

To mesh the geometry:
The automeshing module allows you to mesh interactively on surfaces. It also includes tools for
manipulating surface edges and meshing fixed points (locations where the mesher is required to
place a node). The elements generated are organized into the current component, shells.

2. Select the surface displayed in the graphics area and click mesh.
3. Click using size and biasing = and enter 40.
4. Click recalc all.
5. Click mesh.
The automesher creates about 400 elements on the surface.
Plate mesh using element size of 40mm.
6. Click return to save the mesh in the shells component.

Applying boundary conditions to the model
In this section, the model is constrained such that two of the four edges cannot move. A total lateral
load of 1000N is applied at the edge of the hole so that all forces point in the positive z-direction.
To create collectors:

4. Click name = and enter spcs.

6. Click create.
The collector is created.
7. Click name = again and enter forces.
9. Click create.
The collector is created.
To create constraints:

2. Click loadcol = and select spcs.
3. Click return.
HyperMesh goes to the Build Window panel.
7. Click interior, if not already selected.
8. Create a window around the left and right edges of the model. Do this by picking points on the
screen with your mouse.
The nodes along the left and right edges of the model are selected (see the figure below).
Select these nodes to apply single point constraints

10. Click dof1-dof6, if not already selected.
11. Click create to apply these constraints to the selected nodes.
To create forces on the nodes around the hole:

2. Click loadcol = and select forces.
3. Click return.
HyperMesh goes to the Build Window panel.
7. Click interior.
8. Create a window around the hole of the model. Do this by picking points on the screen with your
mouse.
The nodes around the hole of the model are selected (see the figure below).
Select these nodes to create loading around hole.
10. Click nodes and select save from the extended entity selection menu.
11. Click return.
12. Select the count panel on the Tool page.

The nodes are counted automatically so that a calculation can be made to create a total force of
1000N.
13. Click the upper left switch and select nodes.
14. Click nodes and select retrieve from the extended entity select menu.
The nodes saved in the forces panel are retrieved.
15. Click selected to count the number of nodes around the hole.
16. Click return.
18. Click nodes and select retrieve from the extended entity selection menu.
19. Click magnitude = and enter 1000/47 or /number of nodes found in the count panel.
The total load on the nodes around the hole is 1000N.
20. Click the plane and vector definition switch below magnitude = and select z-axis.
21. Click create.
22. Click return.
The last step in setting up the boundary conditions is to create a NASTRAN subcase (a load
step in HyperMesh).

2. Click name = and enter lateral force.
3. Click loadcols and select spcs and forces.
4. Click select.
5. Click create.
The load step is created.
6. Click return.
To create control cards:
1. Select the cntl cards panel on the BCs page.

2. Click SOL.
3. Click the switch and select either Statics (SOL 101) or Statics & Lin. Heat Transfer (SOL 24)
from the pop-up menu.
4. Click return.
5. Click PARAM.
6. Click AUTOSPC.
7. Click return.

Writing the NASTRAN Input Deck
In this tutorial, write the NASTRAN input deck file, specified with the .dat extension, before running
NASTRAN.
To write your file:

3. If the nastran/general template is not specified in the template = field, click template = and
select the general template file from the nastran directory.
4. Click filename = and enter plate_hole.dat.
5. Click write.
This writes your HyperMesh database as a NASTRAN ASCII input deck.
To save your .hm file and exit HyperMesh:

3. Click file = and enter plate_hole_new.hm.
4. Click save.
6. Click quit to exit HyperMesh.
To add output requests to your deck:
1. Open the plate_hole.dat file in a text editor, such as WordPad.

2. After the SUBCASE 1 card, insert the following cards:
DISPLACEMENT(PUNCH)=ALL
STRESS(PUNCH)=ALL
3. Save the changes to your file.
4. Exit the text editor and submit the job to NASTRAN for analysis.

Viewing the Results
After running NASTRAN, the punch file plate_hole.pch is created. This file contains
displacement and stress results for your linear static analysis. This section describes how to view
those results in HyperMesh. Use the utility program hmnast to translate the .pch file into a
HyperMesh results file.
To run hmnast, attach the results file and set visual options:
1. From a UNIX or MS-DOS prompt, type the following:

hmnast –d –von_max plate_hole.pch plate_hole.hmres
2. Start HyperMesh and remove any model that is currently loaded:
- Select the delete panel on the Tool page.
- Click delete model.
- Select Yes from the pop-up window.
3. Retrieve the input deck that was used to run the NASTRAN job:
- Select the files panel.
- Select the import subpanel.
- Double click translator = and select nastran.
- Double click filename = and choose plate_hole.dat.
- Click EXTERNAL.
- Click the upper toggle to no overwrite.
- Click import.
4. Set the visual options:
- Select the command subpanel.
- Double click file = and choose nastut1.cmf, located in the HyperMesh installation directory
under /tutorials/hm.
- Click execute.
5. Attach the results file for post-processing:
- Select the results subpanel.
- Double click results file = and select plate_hole.hmres, located in the directory from
which NASTRAN is run.

SUBCASE-1 is the only simulation. If you had created two load steps, two simulations would
exist: SUBCASE-1 and SUBCASE-2. The subcase IDs reflect your HyperMesh load step IDs.
3. Click Subcase-1.

5. Click deform to view a deformed plot of your model overlaid on the original, undeformed mesh
Isometric view of deformed plot overlaid on original undeformed mesh. Model units are set to 250.

2. Click simulation = and select Subcase-1.
5. Select top from the pop-up menu.
6. Click contour.
7. Click data type = and select von Mises Stress(max,all).
8. Click assign.
9. Click contour and compare your model to the picture below.
von Mises stress plot using discrete contours (in performance graphics mode).

Modeling Contact for ABAQUS - HM-1020-L
This tutorial explains how to use the interface between HyperMesh and ABAQUS. The following
exercises are included:
• Defining material properties.

• Defining properties for solid elements.
• Defining contact surfaces and interactions.
• Defining spring elements and properties.
• Creating loads and boundary conditions.
• Exporting the file to ABAQUS.
• Running hmabaqus and post processing.
administrator for assistance.
Defining Material Properties

HyperMesh supports many different material models for ABAQUS. In this example, you create the
basic *ELASTIC material model with no temperature variation. The material properties are then
assigned to the elements by the component collector.
To read in the initial model file:

3. Double-click file = and select abaqus3_0tutorial.hm.
4. Click retrieve.
To select the ABAQUS template:

2. Double-click template file = and choose abaqus/standard.3d from the templates directory.
To set the pre-prepared visual options:
1. Select the command subpanel.

2. Double-click file = and choose abtut1.cmf.
3. Click execute.
4. Click return to exit the panel.

To create the *ELASTIC material model card:

2. Create the material collector with the appropriate card image:
- Select the create subpanel.
- Click the switch after collector type and select mats.
- Click the switch under creation method: and select card image.
- Click name = and enter STEEL
- Click card image = and choose ABAQUS_MATERIAL
- Click create/edit.
3. Edit the card image to add the appropriate material model cards:
- Select ELASTIC in the option list.
- By default, the selected type is ISOTROPIC. If it is not set to ISOTROPIC, click the switch
and select it.
- In the card image section of the menu, click the field beneath E and enter 2.1E5.
- In the card image section of the menu, click the field beneath NU and enter 0.3
- Click return to accept the changes to the card image.
To tie the material card to the component collectors:

3. Click the upper switch and select comps.
4. Click material = and select STEEL.
5. Double-click comps and select INDENTOR and BEAM from the list.
6. Click select to finish the selection process.
7. Click update.
8. Select material id from the list.
9. Click update.

Defining Properties for Solid Elements
HyperMesh supports properties for shells, solids and beams from the component collector. In this
example, create the *SOLID SECTION property cards and tie them to the already existing component
collectors.
To create *SOLID SECTION property cards for already existing components:

4. Click card image = and select SOLIDSECTION.
5. Click load.
6. Select INDENTOR and BEAM from the list of components.
To view the *SOLID SECTION property cards:
1. Select the card panel from the permanent menu.

3. Click comps and select INDENTOR from the list of component collectors.
5. Click edit to view the *SOLID SECTION property card image.
6. Click return to finish the viewing process.
Defining Contact Surfaces and Surface Interactions

HyperMesh supports definition of the *SURFACE DEFINITION card using sets, components, or
individual element IDs with faces. In this example, you use individual element faces to define the
slave contact surface and sets to define the master contact surface. This model is made from solid
elements, so you must first skin the surface with face elements, and then use those face elements to
define the contact surface.
To create face elements on solids:
1. Select the faces panel from the Tool page.

2. Click the input collector switch and choose comps.
3. Click comps and select INDENTOR from the list of components.
5. Click find faces.

To view the face elements without the rest of the model:
1. Select the display panel from the permanent menu.

3. Click the toggle to elems.
4. Use the right mouse button to deselect INDENTOR and BEAM.
6. Select the view panel from the permanent menu and select left from the pop-up menu.
To mask the face elements not involved in the contact surface:
1. Select the mask panel from the Tool page.

3. Click the input collector switch and select elems from the pop-up menu.
4. Click elems and select by window from the pop-up menu.
5. Pick points on the screen to create a window like the one shown in the picture below.

7. Click mask .
8. Select the view panel from the permanent menu and select iso 1 from the pop-up menu.

To create the *CONTACT PAIR card:
1. Select the interfaces panel from the BCs page.

3. Click name = and enter the name: CONTACT1
4. Click the switch under creation method: and click card image.
5. Click card image = and select CONTACT_PAIR.
6. Click type = and select CONTACT_PAIR.
7. Click interface color and select a color.
8. Click create.
To define the slave *SURFACE DEFINITION using face elements:
1. Select the interfaces panel on the BCs page.

2. Select the add subpanel.
3. Double-click name = and select CONTACT1.
4. Click the switch under slave: and select entity.
5. Click elems to the right of slave and select displayed from the extended entity selection menu.
6. Click add to the right of slave: to add these faces to the *SURFACE DEFINITION.
When elements are added to a group, HyperMesh creates ghost element images that are placed
into the group. The original element that was selected is not modified.
To tie the slave elements to the underlying solids:
1. Select the faces panel on the Tool page.

2. Click delete faces.
To define the master *SURFACE DEFINITION using sets:
1. Select the interfaces panel from the BCs page.

4. Click the switch under master: and select sets.
5. Click sets and choose BEAMSURF from the list of sets.
7. Click update on the same line as master: to add the set to the *SURFACE DEFINITION.

To complete the definition of the *CONTACT PAIR card:

4. Click edit.
5. Click the field under SLAVE in the *CONTACT PAIR card image and enter SLAVE1.
6. Click the field under MASTER in the *CONTACT PAIR card image and enter MASTER1.
7. Select the option SmallSliding from the option list.
Notice that the parameter SMALL SLIDING now appears in the card image.
To add the *SURFACE DEFINITION and *SURFACE INTERACTION cards:
1. Click MasterSurfaceDefinition.
Note that a *SURFACE DEFINITION card now appears in the card image.
There are two ways to define the surface from a set:
- If you want to define the surface by explicitly specifying a face:
Click the selection box under MSLabel(1) and choose S1 from the pop-up menu.
Using this method requires all of the elements in the set to be aligned properly and also requires
you to know which face is involved in the contact. Also note that ABAQUS does not allow the
TRIM option to be used simultaneously with a face identifier. In order to use the TRIM option
(discussed next), you must have the MSLabel(1) switch set to NoLabel.
- If you want to define the surface using the ABAQUS TRIM functionality:
Click the TRIM option under MasterSurfaceDefinition.
Click the switch under TRIM and select YES from the list.
Using this method allows ABAQUS to automatically define the master surface based on the
rules found in the ABAQUS User’s Manual. Also note that ABAQUS does not allow the TRIM
option to be used simultaneously with a face identifier. In order to use the TRIM option, you
must have the MSLabel(1) switch set to NoLabel.
2. Click SlaveSurfaceDefinition.
No modification of the slave *SURFACE DEFINITION card is necessary since the surface is
defined using element faces. When you export the deck to ABAQUS, a list of the element faces
is written after the *SURFACE DEFINITION card.
3. Click SurfaceInteraction.
4. Select the Friction option under SurfaceInteraction to add a *FRICTION card.
5. Click the field beneath FrictionCoeff in the card image and enter 0.05
6. Click return to accept the changes to the card image.

Defining Spring Elements and Properties
In ABAQUS contact problems, it is common to use weakly grounded springs to provide stability to the
solution in the first loading step. This section explains how to create these springs and how to create
the *SPRING card.
To reset the view for further processing:

4. Click the all button on the right side of the panel.
To create the *SPRING property card:

2. Create a property collector with the appropriate card image:
- Click the switch after collector type and select props.
- Click name = and enter SPRING
- Click card image = and choose SPRING.
3. Edit the card image to add the appropriate options:
- Click the field beneath SETNAME in the card image and enter GROUNDED
- Click the field beneath dof1 in the card image and enter 3.
- The dof2 field in the *SPRING card is ignored by ABAQUS for SPRING1 elements.
- Click the field beneath Stiffness in the card image and enter 1.0E-5
To create a component to group the spring elements according to property:

4. Click the switch under creation method: and click no card image.
5. Click name = and enter GROUNDED.

The name of this component must be the same as the name in the SETNAME field in the
*SPRING property card or the elements are not tied properly to the property card.
6. Click color and select Color10.

7. Click create.
To create the spring elements and tie them to the property:
1. Select the elem types panel on the 1D page.

2. Click mass = and select SPRING1.
In HyperMesh, grounded elements are created and stored as mass elements since they only
have one node in the element connectivity.

5. Click component = and select GROUNDED from the list of component collectors.
As the spring elements are created, they are placed in this component. This component is then
tied to the *SPRING card through the name: GROUNDED.

7. Create the spring elements:
- Select the masses panel on the 1D page.
- Click property = and select SPRING from the list of property collectors.
- Click nodes and select by id from the pop-up menu.
- Type the following in the id = selection window: 451t460b3
This shorthand selects all of the nodes from 451 to 460 in increments of 3.
- Click create.
Defining Loads and Boundary Conditions

In HyperMesh, every load collector with the ABAQUS_STEP dictionary loaded creates a new *STEP
in the ABAQUS deck. This model has only one loading step.
To create the *STEP load collector:

4. Click name = and enter the name: STEP1.
5. Click the switch under creation method: and select card image.
6. Click card image = and choose ABAQUS_STEP.
7. Click color and choose Color 5 from the pop-up menu.

8. Click create.
To edit the *STEP load collector:

4. Double-click name = and select STEP1 from the list of load collectors.
5. Click edit.
6. Add parameters to the *STEP card:
- Select StepParameters in the options list.
- Select Increment and Nlgeom from below StepParameters in the options list.
- Click the field beneath INCREMENT in the card image and enter 100.
7. Add the *STATIC card to the card image:
- Select Static in the options list.
You may have to use the scroll bar on the left side of the screen in the options list to find the
Static option.
- Click the Init_Increment field in the card image to change from the default value.
- Click the field beneath Init_Increment in the card image and enter 0.05
8. Add the *NODE FILE card to the card image:
- Select NodeResults in the options list.
- Select U from below NodeResults in the options list.
9. Add the *ELEMENT FILE card to the card image:
- Select ElementResults in the options list.
- Select S and SINV from below ElementResults in the options list.
10. Add the *CONTACT FILE card to the card image:
- Select ContactResults in the options list.
- Select CSTRESS from below ContactResults in the options list.
11. Add the *FILE FORMAT card to the card image:
- Select FileFormat in the options list.
- Click the switch under FILEFORMAT and select ASCII from the list.
12. Click return to accept the changes to the card image.
To create an entity set for loading:
1. Select the entity sets panel on the BCs page.

2. Click name = and enter LOADED.
4. Select the view panel from the permanent menu and select left from the pop-up menu.

5. Click nodes and select by window from the pop-up menu.
6. Click points on the screen to create the pick window shown in the picture below.

8. Click create.
To create constraints on the BEAM component:

3. Activate the check boxes next to dof1, dof2, and dof3.
4. Deactivate the check boxes next to dof4, dof5, and dof6.
5. Click nodes and select by sets from the extended entity selection menu.
6. Select ENDS from the list of entity sets.
7. Click select.
8. Click create.
To create constraints on the INDENTOR component:

3. Activate the check boxes next to dof1, and dof2.
4. Deactivate the check boxes next to dof3, dof4, dof5, and dof6.
6. Select LOADED.

7. Click select.
8. Click create.
To create forces on the INDENTOR component:

4. Select LOADED.
5. Click select.
6. Click the upper switch and select vectors.
7. Click magnitude = and enter 10.0
8. Click the lower switch and select z-axis.
9. Click the toggle to global system.
10. Click create.
Exporting the File to ABAQUS

The data currently stored in the database must be output to an ABAQUS .inp file for use with the
ABAQUS solver. The .inp file can then be used to perform the analysis using the ABAQUS outside
of HyperMesh.
To export the .inp file:

3. Double-click template = and choose abaqus/standard.3d from the templates directory.
4. Click filename = and type in a name for the input deck: job1.inp
5. Select TEMPLATE.
6. Click the toggle to all.
7. Click write.
To save the .hm file and quit from HyperMesh:

3. Click file = and type job1.hm.
4. Click save.

After you quit HyperMesh you can run the ABAQUS solver using the job1.inp file that was written
from HyperMesh.
Running hmabaqus and Post-Processing

After you have run the job using ABAQUS, the .fil file is available. In order to read the results into
HyperMesh, you must use the hmabaqus external results translator to convert the ABAQUS .fil file to
a HyperMesh formatted results file. Once this is done, you can attach the results file and perform
post-processing procedures.
If you ran ABAQUS and created your own .fil file, run the hmabaqus results translator to create the
results file. If you did not run the solver, you can use the abaqus3_0tutorial.hmres file supplied
in the Tutorial directory.
To run hmabaqus:
• At a UNIX or MS-DOS prompt, enter hmabaqus job1.fil job1.hmres.
To import the hm file, attach the results file, and set visual options:
1. If you have a model loaded into HyperMesh, follow these procedures:

- Select the delete panel from the Tool page.
- Answer Yes in the pop-up window.
3. Read the input deck that was used to run the ABAQUS job or the input deck supplied in the
tutorials directory:
- Double-click translator = and choose abaqus from the feinput directory.
- Double-click filename = and choose job1.inp, if you ran your own solver program and
abaqus3_0tutorial.inp, if you want to use the supplied file.
- Select EXTERNAL.
- Click import.
4. Set the pre-prepared visual options:
- Select the command subpanel.
- Double-click file = and choose abtut2.cmf from the tutorials directory.
- Click execute.
- If you are using the x version of HyperMesh, an error message may be displayed. Select
continue in the pop-up menu.

5. Assign the results file for post-processing:
- Double-click results file = and choose job1.hmres if you ran your own solver program and
abaqus3_0tutorial.res if you want to use the supplied file.
To post-process displacement and stress results:

2. Click simulation = and select: step 1 inc 7, t=1.00e+00
Notice that each increment in the ABAQUS analysis is a new simulation.

4. Click the leftmost switch and select model units from the pop-up menu.
5. Click model units = and enter 10.0
6. Click contour.
7. Click data type = and select Von Mises.
8. Select the view panel from the permanent menu and select restore 1 from the pop-up menu.
9. Click assign.
The default location for ABAQUS to output stress values is at the Integration Points. The
hmabaqus program takes these values and averages them to the centroid of each element.
Therefore, the most accurate representation of the stress values as they were reported from
ABAQUS can be found with an assigned plot.
To post-process incremental results:

2. Click start with = and select step 1 inc 1, t=5.00e-02.
3. Click end with = and select step 1 inc 7, t=1.00e+00.
4. Click data type = and select Von Mises.
If you are using the x-version, skip to Step 12.
6. Click transient.
HyperMesh calculates seven frames of animation showing the displacement and von Mises
stress for each increment. In a non-linear analysis, this type of animation is necessary to view the
history of the stress development.
7. Once the animation begins, click the leftmost toggle to visual options.
8. Click the toggle next to mode and select hidden line.
9. Click the toggle next to color and select contour.
10. Click return to exit the animation.

11. Activate the hidden line option.
HyperMesh calculates seven frames of animation showing the displacement and von Mises
stress for each increment. In a non-linear analysis, this type of animation is necessary to view the
history of the stress development.
13. Click return to exit the animation.

To set up the display for post-processing contact results:

4. Click none.
The elements displayed on the screen are the slave elements that are involved in the contact. To
view the contact results, the underlying element faces must be visible. The following steps show
all of the elements connected to these slave element faces.
7. Select the find panel on the Tool page.

8. Select the find attached subpanel.
9. Click the upper switch and select elems.
10. Click the switch under attached to: and select elems.
11. Click elems under attached to: and select displayed from the extended entity selection menu.
12. Click find.
To post-process contact results:

2. Click simulation = and select: step 1 inc 7, t=1.00e+00
Notice that each increment in the ABAQUS analysis is a new simulation.
3. Click data type = and select Contact Pressure.

4. Click the second switch down, which should be set to model units, and choose undeformed
from the pop-up menu.
5. Click contour.
At this point, an error message is displayed in the message bar that states:
Some node results were not found (ignored).
When ABAQUS reports contact results, it only reports values for the nodes directly on the slave
surface. Therefore, the nodes on the other end of the displayed solid elements don’t have any
contact results reported from ABAQUS. HyperMesh recognizes that there are no values at those

nodes and reports an error message to warn you that they may be missing results. Also notice
that the contact pressure is high on the corners of the slave surface, but is zero in the middle
where no contact is occurring.

Stress Analysis using ANSYS - HM-1030
This tutorial demonstrates how to use the HyperMesh ANSYS interface for stress analysis.

• Updating Elements
• Defining Element Properties
• Updating Load Types
• Exporting a HyperMesh Database File to ANSYS
• Translating Results in ANSYS
administrator.
A Description of the Model

A compressor wheel with blades is modeled as a plane stress problem with two planes of symmetry.
The blades are connected to the wheel using dovetail joints. The wheel and dovetail joints are
modeled using plane42 elements. The region of contact between the dovetail and the wheel slot is
modeled using point-to-point gap elements. The blades are modeled using lumped mass elements
connected to the dovetail joint with link elements. The loading is centrifugal (angular velocity of 3600
rpm). The gap elements make this a non-linear analysis.

Updating Elements
In this tutorial, make the existing element types ANSYS-compatible elements.

4. Select the hm-ansys.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under
/tutorials/hm/.
5. HyperMesh returns to the files panel. Note that file = now displays the location of the hm-
ansys.hm file.
6. Click retrieve.
To select the ANSYS template:

2. Double click template file =.
3. Select the ansys.2d template from the \ansys\ directory.
4. Click return.
To update elements:
1. Select the elem types panel on the 2-D page.

2. Click mass = and select MASS21.
3. Click rod = and select LINK1.
4. Click gap = and select CONTAC12.
5. Click tria3 = and select PLANE42.
6. Click quad4 = and select PLANE42.
7. Click elems and select all from the extended entity selection menu.
8. Click update.
9. Click return.

Defining Element Properties
In this tutorial, define element properties based on the ANSYS template.
To define plane element properties:
1. Select the card panel on the permanent menu.

3. Click comps again and select WHEEL and DOVETAIL.
4. Click select.
5. Click card image = and select PLANE42.
6. Click edit.
HyperMesh goes to the card image panel.
7. Select kopt3_FLAG.
8. Click the data entry field under kopt3 and enter 0.
9. Click return.
HyperMesh returns to the card panel.
To define options for mass, gap, and link elements:

4. Double click name = and select MASS.
5. Click card image = and select MASS21.
6. Click load/edit.
9. Click return.
HyperMesh returns to the collectors panel.
10. Double click name = and select GAP.
11. Click card image = and select CONTAC12.
12. Click load/edit.

19. Click return.

20. Double click name = and select LINK.
21. Click card image = and select LINK1.
23. Click return.
To create a property collector for mass elements:

3. Click the switch after collector type: and select props.
4. Click name = and enter MASS.
5. Click card image = and select MASS21p from the pop-up menu.
6. Click material = and select mat.
8. Click R_LEN = and enter 1.
9. Click the data entry field under R and enter 100 for the mass of the MASS elements.
10. Click return.
To create a property collector for gap elements:

3. Click name = and enter GAP.
4. Click card image = and select CONTAC12p.

8. Click the data entry field under R and enter 0. Use the TAB key to enter the following values in
the remaining data entry fields: 2 E 05, 0, and 0.
9. Click return.
To create a property collector for link elements:

3. Click name = and enter LINK.
4. Click card image = and select LINK1p.
8. Click the data entry field under R and enter 10 for the cross sectional area of the link elements.
9. Click return.
After creating property collectors, assign them to their respective element types.
To update mass element properties:
1. Select the masses panel on the 1-D page.

4. Click config = and select mass from the extended entity selection menu.
6. Click property = and select MASS.
7. Click update.
8. Select property.
9. Click update.

To update the gap element properties:
1. Select the gaps panel on the 1-D page.

4. Click config = and select gap from the extended entity selection menu.
6. Click property = and select GAP.
7. Click update.
8. Select property.
9. Click update.
To update the rod elements:
1. Select the rods panel on the 1-D page.

4. Click config = and select rod from the extended entity selection menu.
6. Click property = and select LINK.
7. Click update.
8. Click return.
Updating Load Types

In this tutorial, make the existing load types ANSYS compatible.
1. Select the load types panel on the BCs page.

2. Click constraint = and select D_CONSTRNT.
3. Click loads and select all from the extended entity selection menu.
4. Click update.
5. Click return.
Exporting a HyperMesh Database File to ANSYS

In this tutorial, edit your HyperMesh database file and export it to ANSYS.
To write the ANSYS .prp file:

3. Click filename = and enter hm-ansys.prp.
4. Click write.
5. Click return.
6. Click quit to end the HyperMesh session.
You do not need to save the HyperMesh file.
To edit the ANSYS file:
You must edit the hm-ansys.prp file since HyperMesh does not translate the application of angular
velocity to ANSYS.
1. Open the hm-ansys.prp file in a text editor.
2. Before the /SOLU command, insert the following command:
OMEGA,,,10
(3600 rpm ˜ 10 rad/s)
3. Save the file and exit.
You can now submit the hm-ansys.prp file to ANSYS for analysis.
Translating Results in ANSYS

The ANSYS analysis performed on the hm-ansys.prp file generated a file named hm-ansys.rst.
hmansys translates this ANSYS binary file into a HyperMesh binary results file using the command
line utility hmansys.exe. You can then use the HyperMesh binary results file, hm-ansys.hmres,
for post-processing.
To generate the file hm-ansys.hmres:

2. Click the switch and select hmansys.
3. Click input file = and enter hm-ansys.rst.
4. Click output file = and enter hm-ansys.hmres.
5. Click options = and enter the platform on which the ANSYS analysis was performed and enter
other options as needed. For more information, see Results Translation in the External
Interfacing on-line help.
6. Click solve.
7. To specify the HyperMesh results file, click results file = on the global panel and select hm-
ansys.hmres.

Modeling Contact for MARC - HM-1050
This tutorial explains how to use the 2-D interface between HyperMesh and MARC. The following
• Defining Material Properties.

• Defining Geometry Properties for 2-D Solid Elements.
• Defining Contact Bodies and Contact Properties.
• Creating Loads and Boundary Conditions.
• Defining Control Cards.
• Exporting the File to MARC.
• Running hmmarc and Post Processing.

HyperMesh supports many different material models for MARC. In this example, you create two
different material models with no temperature variation. The component collector then assigns the
material properties to the elements.

3. Double-click file = and select marc2d_tutorial.hm.
4. Click retrieve.
To select the MARC template for a 2-D mechanical analysis:

2. Double-click file = and choose marc/stress2d.tpl from the templates directory.
3. Click return.

To create the ISOTROPIC material model card:

- Click name = and enter STEEL.
- Click card image = and choose ISOTROPIC.
- In the card image section of the menu, click the field beneath Youngs and enter 2.1E5.
- In the card image section of the menu, click the field beneath Poissons and enter 0.3
To create the MOONEY material model card:

- Click name = and enter RUBBER.
- Click card image = and select MOONEY.
- In the card image section of the menu, click the field beneath C10 and enter 0.8.
- In the card image section of the menu, click the field beneath C01 and enter 0.2

To tie the ISOTROPIC material card to the component collector:

4. Click comps and select STEEL from the list.
6. Click material = and select STEEL.
7. Click update.
9. Click update.
To tie the MOONEY material card to the component collector:
1. Click review.
2. Select RUBBER from the list.
3. Click comps and select RUBBER from the list.
5. Click material = and select RUBBER.
6. Click update.
8. Click update.

Defining Geometry Properties for 2-D Solid Elements
HyperMesh supports geometry properties for shells, solids and beams from the component collector.
In this example, create the GEOMETRY model definition cards and tie them to the existing
component collectors.
To create GEOMETRY model definition cards for already existing components:

4. Click name = and select STEEL.
5. Click card image = and select GEOMETRY.
6. Click load/edit.
7. In the card image section of the menu, click the field beneath EGEOM(1) and enter 1.0.
9. Click name = and select RUBBER.
To view or change the entries in a geometry model definition card:

3. Click comps and select RUBBER from the list of component collectors.
5. Click edit to view or edit the GEOMETRY model definition card image.
6. Click return to finish the viewing process or change an entry.
Note: You can also define a GEOMETRY model definition card during the creation of a
component collector.

Defining Contact Bodies and Contact Properties
HyperMesh supports the definition of deformable and rigid contact bodies for stress analysis. A
deformable contact body can be defined using sets, components, or individual element IDs. In this
example, you use individual element ID’s to define the deformable contact body. This has the
advantage of a graphical visualization of the defined deformable body. The present version of the
interface cannot handle a rigid body definition based on more than one curve segment. Therefore all
curves which describe the rigid body have to be combined into a single curve. In this example, define
the rigid body in the most common manner as line segments. Notice that HyperMesh creates an
interface group for each contact body (also for the contact header block).
To create line segments of the plot element type on curves:
1. Select the global panel from the permanent menu.

2. Select the component = subpanel and select RIGID.
3. Click the element order: toggle and select first.
4. Click the element size = button and enter 0.5.
6. Select the elem types panel from the 1-D page.
7. Click the plot subpanel and select FACET_2.
9. Select the line mesh panel from the 1-D page.
11. Pick the line where you want to create elements.
12. Click the toggle to select segment is whole line.
13. Click the element config: switch and select plot.
14. Click mesh.
15. Click return to exit the subpanel.
16. Click return to exit the line mesh panel.
To define the header for the contact model definition card:

2. Select the interfaces subpanel.
5. Click name = and enter header.
6. Click type = and enter CONTACT_HEADER.
Notice that the parameter CONTACT_HEADER now appears in the card image.
8. Edit the card image:

- In the card image section of the menu, click the field beneath MaxEnt and enter 500.
- Click the field beneath MxNod and enter 500.
- Click the field beneath FricTy and select 5.
- Click the field beneath CoulFr and select 1.
- Click the field beneath BIAS and enter 0.9.
9. Click return to exit the card image panel.
10. Click return to exit the interfaces panel.
To define the deformable contact body:

2. Select the interfaces panel.
5. Click name = and enter defbody1.
6. Click type = and enter BODY_2D_DEFORMABLE.
Notice that the parameter BODY_2D_DEFORMABLE now appears in the card image.
7. Select the interface color subpanel and select Color 12.

In the card image section of the menu, click the field beneath BodyID and enter 1.

12. Click the switch under slave: and select entity.
13. Click elems to the right of slave: and select by comp.
14. Select component RUBBER.
15. Click select.
16. Click add to the right of slave: to add these elements to the deformable body defbody1.
When elements are added to a group, HyperMesh creates ghost element images that are placed
into the group. The original element that was selected is not modified.
To define the rigid contact body:

5. Click name = and enter rigbody2.

6. Click type = and enter BODY_2D_RIGID.
Notice that the parameter BODY_2D_RIGID now appears in the card image.
- Click the ITYPE switch and select LINE SEGMENT.
- In the card image section of the menu, click the field beneath BodyID and enter 2.
- In the card image section of the menu, click the field beneath VelX and enter –8.5.
11. Click the switch under slave: and select comps.
12. Double-click comps to the right of slave:.
13. Select component RIGID.
14. Click select.
15. Click update to the right of slave: to add these plot elements to the rigid body rigbody2.
Notice that for the definition of a rigid body as line segments, you have to add the plot elements to
the interface group by components.
To view the normal direction of the line elements:

2. Select the summary panel.
3. Double-click template file = and select show_normals2d.sum
4. Click the toggle above print it and switch to displayed.
5. Click summary.
Notice that three vectors appear on the rigid body, which define the normal vector direction of the
rigid body following a right handed rule. For the correct contact definition in MARC, these vectors
have to point into the rigid body.
6. Click return.
To change the normal direction of the line elements:

2. Select the summary panel.
3. Double-click template file = and select reverse_normals.sum
4. Click the toggle above print it and switch to displayed
5. Click summary.
The reverse_normals.sum template only works for a single displayed rigid body. If there is
more than one rigid body in your model, mask the others and execute the template only for the
displayed rigid body. You have to repeat the steps above for all desired rigid bodies.
3. Click return.

Creating Loads and Boundary Conditions
In HyperMesh, every load collector can be used to define a set of loads and boundary conditions.
The load collectors can be added to a loadstep, which defines either a model definition data card
block (before END OPTION card), or a history definition data card block (between two CONTINUE
cards) in the MARC input deck.
To create the MODEL DEFINITION DATA load collector:

4. Click name = and enter the name model_def_loads.
6. Click create.
Notice that in the main menu header bar next to the quit button, the active load collector
model_def_loads appears. All loads and boundary conditions are now added to this load
collector.
To create constraints on the STEEL component:

2. Select the constraints panel.
4. Click size and enter 1.
5. Activate the check boxes next to dof1, and dof2.
6. Deactivate the check boxes next to dof3, dof4, dof5 and dof6.

10. Click create.
To assign the load collector model_def_loads to a loadstep:

2. Select the load steps panel.
3. Click name = and enter model_definition_block.
4. Click loadcols and select the load collector model_def_loads.
5. Click select.
6. Click create.

To edit the loadstep card image and define a MODEL DEFINITION DATA load and constraint
block (ZERO INCREMENT):

2. Click the upper switch and select loadsteps.
3. Click loadsteps and select the loadstep: model_definition_block.
4. Click select.
5. Click edit.
6. Edit the card image to add the appropriate MODEL DEFINITION CARDS:
- Select Initial from the option list.
- Select CONTROL from the option list.
- Select NOPRINT from the option list.
- Select CONTACT TABLE from the option list.
- In the card image section of the menu, click the field beneath NrSets and enter 2.
Notice that two SETS of contact table entries appear.
- Click the field beneath TBo(1) and enter 1.
- Click the field beneath FricC(1) and enter 0.5.
- Click the field beneath Bo(0,0) and enter 1.
- Click the field beneath TBo(2) and enter 1.
- Click the field beneath FricC(2) and enter 0.3.
- Click the field beneath Bo(1,0) and enter 2.
To create the HISTORY DEFINITION DATA load collector:

4. Click name = and enter the name: history1_def_loads.
6. Click create.
Notice that in the main menu header bar next to the quit button, the active load collector
history1_def_loads is displayed. All loads and boundary conditions are now added to this load
collector.

To assign the load collector history1_def_loads to a new loadstep:

2. Select the loadsteps panel.
3. Click name = and enter history1_definition_block.
4. Click loadcols and select the load collector history1_def_loads.
5. Click select.
6. Click create.
To edit the loadstep card image and define a HISTORY DEFINITION DATA load and constraint
block (LOADCASE):

3. Click loadsteps and select the loadstep history1_definition_block.
4. Click select.
5. Click edit.
6. Edit the card image to add the appropriate HISTORY DEFINITION CARDS:
- Select CONTROL from the option list.
- Select AUTOLOAD_TIMESTEP from the option list.
- In the card image section of the menu, click the field beneath nitems and enter 60.
- In the card image section of the menu, click the field beneath timeinc and enter 0.017.
- Select MOTION_CHANGE from the option list.
- In the card image section of the menu, click the field beneath NrSets2 and enter 1.
- In the card image section of the menu, click the field beneath ID(1) and enter 2.
- In the card image section of the menu, click the field beneath Velx(1) and enter -8.5.

Defining Control Cards
The definition of the MARC PARAMETER DEFINITION DATA cards in HyperMesh is available on the
cntl cards panel.
To define the appropriate MARC PARAMETER DEFINITION DATA cards:

2. Select the cntl cards subpanel.
3. Select the appropriate PARAMETER DEFINITION DATA cards:
- Click title.
- Edit the card image section and enter 2d contact example beneath the title field.
- Click return to exit the panel.
- Click sizing and click return (there is nothing to edit).
- Click §no list and click return.
- Click large disp and click return.
- Click print .
- Edit the card image section and enter 5 beneath the print field.
- Click setname.
- Edit the card image section and enter 50 beneath the UpBound field.
- Click post.
- Edit the card image section and enter 1 beneath the nrvar field.
- Edit the card image section and enter 6 beneath the style field.
- Edit the card image section and enter 47 beneath the code field.
- Edit the card image section and enter equiv. Cauchy Stress beneath the label field.

Exporting the File to MARC
The data currently stored in the database must be output to a MARC .dat file for use with the MARC
solver. The .dat file can then be used to perform the analysis using the MARC solver outside of
HyperMesh.
To export the .dat file:

3. Double-click template = and choose MARC/stress2d.tpl from the templates directory.
4. Click filename = and type in demo_2d.dat for the input deck.
5. Select TEMPLATE.
7. Click write.
To save the .hm file and quit HyperMesh:

3. Click file = and type demo_2d.hm.
4. Click save.
After you quit HyperMesh you can run the MARC solver using the demo_2d.dat file that was written
from HyperMesh.
Running hmmarc and Post-Processing

After you have run the job using MARC, the .t16 file is available. In order to read the results into
HyperMesh, you must use the hmmarc external results translator to convert the MARC .t16 file to a
HyperMesh formatted results file. Once this is done, you can attach the results file and perform post-
processing procedures.
If you ran MARC and created your own .t16 file, run the hmmarc results translator to create the
results file. If you did not run the solver, you can use the marc2d_tutorial.hmres file supplied in
the Tutorials directory.
To run hmmarc:
• At a UNIX or MS-DOS prompt, enter hmmarc demo_2d.t16 demo_2d.hmres.

To import the hm file and attach the results file:

- Click return.
3. Read the input deck that was used to run the MARC job or the input deck supplied in the Tutorials
directory:
- Double-click translator = and choose marc from the feinput directory.
- Double-click filename = and choose demo_2d.dat if you ran your own solver program, or
marc2d_tutorial.dat, if you want to use the supplied file.
- Select EXTERNAL.
- Click import.
- Double-click file = and choose demo_2d.hmres if you ran your own solver program, or
marc2d_tutorial.hmres if you want to use the supplied file.
To post-process displacement and stress results:

2. Click simulation = and select inc 60, t=1.002.
Notice that each increment in the MARC analysis is a new simulation.
4. Click the leftmost switch and select scale factor from the pop-up menu.
5. Click scale fact = and enter 1.0.
6. Click contour.
7. Click data type = and select equiv. Cauchy stress.
8. Click assign.
The default location for MARC to output stress values is at the Integration Points. The hmmarc
program takes these values and averages them to the centroid of each element. Therefore, the
most accurate representation of the stress values as they were reported from MARC can be
found with an assigned plot.


2. Click start with = and select inc 0, t=0.00.
3. Click end with = and select inc 60, t=1.002.
4. Click data type = and select equiv. Cauchy Stress.
If you are using the x-version, skip to Step 12.

6. Click transient.
HyperMesh calculates seven frames of animation showing the displacement and equivalent
Cauchy Stress for each increment. In a non-linear analysis, this type of animation is necessary
to view the history of the stress development.
10. Click exit to exit the animation.
To post-process contact results:

2. Click simulation = and select inc 60, t=1.002.
3. Click data type = and select Ex. applied forces.
4. Click contour.
Notice that the Hypermesh results translator hmmarc in the present form can only handle results
files of the MARC Version K6. Also, the displacements of rigid bodies are not transferred
correctly in this version.

Modeling a 3-D Example for MARC - HM-1051
This tutorial explains how to use the 3-D interface between HyperMesh and MARC. The following
• Defining Material Properties.

• Defining Geometry Properties for 3-D Solid Elements.
• Creating Loads and Boundary Conditions.
• Defining Control Cards.
• Exporting the File to MARC.
• Running hmmarc and Post Processing.

HyperMesh supports many different material models for MARC. In this example, you create a
material with elastic-plastic mechanical behavior. The component collector then assigns the material
properties to the elements.

3. Double-click file = and select marc3d_tutorial.hm.
4. Click retrieve.
To select the MARC template for a 3-D mechanical stress analysis:

2. Double-click file = and choose marc/stress3d.tpl from the templates directory.
To create the ISOTROPIC material model card:

- Click name = and enter ALU.

- Click card image = and choose ISOTROPIC.
- Select WorkHardData in the option list.
- In the card image section of the menu, click the field beneath Youngs and enter 7.0E4.
- In the card image section of the menu, click the field beneath Poissons and enter 0.33.
- In the card image section of the menu, click the field beneath EqTYS and enter 200.0.
- In the card image section of the menu, click the field beneath nrEq and enter 5.
- In the card image section of the menu, click the table entries beneath EqStress and
EqPlStrain and enter the following values:
EqStress EqPlStrain
200 0.00
210 0.15
240 0.70
245 1.25
248 2.00
To tie the material cards to the component collectors:

4. Click comps and select test_specimen from the list.
6. Click material = and select ALU.
7. Click update.
9. Click update.

Defining Geometry Properties for 3-D Solid Elements
HyperMesh supports geometry properties for shells, solids and beams from the component collector.
In this example, create the GEOMETRY model definition card and tie them to the already existing
component collectors.
To create GEOMETRY model definition cards for already existing components:

4. Double-click name = and select test_specimen.
6. Click load/edit.
To view or change the entries in a geometry model definition card:

3. Click comps and select test_specimen from the list of component collectors.
5. Click edit to view or edit the GEOMETRY model definition card image.
6. Click return to finish the viewing process or change an entry.
Note: You can also define a GEOMETRY model definition card during the creation of a component
collector.
Creating Loads and Boundary Conditions

In HyperMesh, every load collector can be used to define a set of loads and boundary conditions.
The load collectors can be added to a loadstep, which defines either a model definition data card
block (before END OPTION card), or a history definition data card block (between two CONTINUE
cards) in the MARC input deck. In this example, define three HISTORY blocks with different load
magnitudes.
To create the symmetry load collector:


4. Click name = and enter the name symmetry.
6. Click create.
Notice that in the header bar left of the quit button, the active load collector symmetry appears.
All loads and boundary conditions are now added to this load collector.
To create the constraints on the symmetry plane component:

5. Activate the check boxes next to dof1.
6. Deactivate the check boxes next to dof2, dof3, dof4, dof5, and dof6.

10. Click create.

To create all other load collectors:

4. Click name = and enter the name move_zero.
6. Click create.
7. Click name = and enter the name move_history1.
9. Click create.
12. Click create.
15. Click create.
Notice that in the header bar left of the quit button, the active load collector move_history3
appears. All loads and boundary conditions are now added to this load collector.
To create the MODEL DEFINITION Block constraints on the load plane and assign them to the
move_zero load collector:
1. Select the global menu panel.

2. Select the loadcol = subpanel.
3. Select the move_zero loadcollector.
Notice that in the header bar left of the quit button, the active load collector move_zero appears.
All loads and boundary conditions are now added to this load collector.

9. Activate the check boxes next to dof1, dof2, and dof3.
10. Deactivate the check boxes next to dof4, dof5 and dof6.

14. Click create.
To create the constraints for the 1 HISTORY block on the load plane and assign them to the
move_history1 load collector:

3. Select the move_history1 loadcollector.
5. In the field next to dof1 = enter -0.024.
8. Click create.

3. Select the move_history2 loadcollector.

5. In the field beneath dof1 = enter -0.001.
8. Click create.

3. Select the move_history3 load collector.
5. In the field beneath dof1 = enter -0.024.

8. Click create.
To assign the appropriate load collectors to the loadstep defining the MARC MODEL
DEFINITION DATA block:

2. Select the load steps panel.
3. Click name = and enter zero_inc.
4. Click loadcols and select the load collectors symmetry and move_zero.
5. Click select.
6. Click create.
To edit the loadstep card image and define a MODEL DEFINITION DATA load and constraint
block (ZERO INCREMENT):

3. Click loadsteps and select the loadstep zero_inc.
4. Click select.
5. Click edit.
6. Edit the card image to add the appropriate MODEL DEFINITION CARDS:
- Select Initial from the option list.

- Select NOPRINT from the option list.
To assign the appropriate load collectors to the loadsteps defining the MARC HISTORY
Definition DATA blocks:

2. Select the load steps subpanel.
3. Click name = and enter history1.
4. Click loadcols and select the load collector symmetry and move_history1.
5. Click select.
6. Click create.
9. Click select.
10. Click create.
13. Click select.
14. Click create.
To edit the history1 loadstep card image and define a load and constraint block
(LOADCASE_1):

3. Click loadsteps and select the loadstep history1.
4. Click select.
5. Click edit.
- Select CONTROL in the option list.
- In the card image section of the menu, click the field beneath chk1 and enter 0.05.
- Select NOPRINT in the option list.
- Select AUTOLOAD_TIMESTEP in the option list.
- In the card image section of the menu, click the field beneath timeinc and enter 2.

(LOADCASE_2):

4. Click select.
5. Click edit.
- Select AUTOLOAD_TIMESTEP in the option list.
- In the card image section of the menu, click the field beneath timeinc and enter 0.1.
(LOADCASE_3):

4. Click select.
5. Click edit.
- Select AUTOLOAD_TIMESTEP from the option list.
- In the card image section of the menu, click the field beneath timeinc and enter 2.
Defining Control Cards

The definition of the MARC PARAMETER DEFINITION DATA cards in HyperMesh is available on the
cntl cards panel.
To define the appropriate MARC PARAMETER DEFINITION DATA cards:

2. Select the cntl cards subpanel.
3. Select the appropriate PARAMETER DEFINITION DATA cards:
- Click title.
- Edit the card image section and enter 3d contact example beneath the title field.

- Click sizing and click return (there is nothing to edit).
- Click §no list and click return.
- Click large disp and click return.
- Click plasticity.
- Edit the card image section and enter 3 beneath the form field.
- Click solver.
- Edit the card image section and enter 4 beneath the typ field.
- Click optimize.
- Edit the card image section and enter 10 beneath the typ field.
- Click post.
- Edit the card image section and enter 2 beneath the nrvar field.
- Edit the card image section and enter 6 beneath the style field.
- Edit the card image section and enter 17 beneath the first code field.
- Edit the card image section and enter v. Mises Stress beneath the label field.
- Edit the card image section and enter 7 beneath the second code field.
- Edit the card image section and enter Total equiv. pl. Strain beneath the label field.
Exporting the File to MARC

The data currently stored in the database must be output to a MARC .dat file for use with the MARC
solver. The .dat file can then be used to perform the analysis using the MARC outside of
HyperMesh.
To export the .dat file:

3. Double-click template = and choose MARC/stress3d.tpl from the templates directory.
4. Click filename = and enter the name demo_3d.dat for the input deck.
5. Select TEMPLATE.
7. Click write.

To save the .hm file and quit HyperMesh:

3. Click file = and type demo_3d.hm.
4. Click save.
After you quit HyperMesh you can run the MARC solver using the demo_3d.dat file that was written
from HyperMesh.
Running hmmarc and Post-Processing

After you have run the job using MARC, the .t16 file is available. In order to read the results into
HyperMesh you must use the hmmarc external results translator to convert the MARC .t16 file to a
HyperMesh formatted results file. Once this is done, you can attach the results file and perform post-
processing procedures.
If you ran MARC and created your own .t16 file, run the hmmarc results translator to create the
results file. If you did not run the solver, you can use the marc3d_tutorial.hmres file supplied in
the Tutorials directory.
To run hmmarc:
• At a UNIX or MS-DOS prompt, enter hmmarc demo_3d.t16 demo_3d.hmres.
To import the hm file, attach the results file:

- Click return.
3. Read the input deck that was used to run the MARC job or the input deck supplied in the
tutorials directory:
- Double-click translator = and choose marc from the feinput directory.
- Double-click filename = and choose demo_3d.dat if you ran your own solver program, or
marc3d_tutorial.dat if you want to use the supplied file.
- Select EXTERNAL.

- Click import.
- Double-click results file = and choose demo_3d.hmres if you ran your own solver program,
or marc3d_tutorial.hmres if you want to use the supplied file.
To post-process displacements and stress results:

2. Click simulation = and select inc 107, t=100.
4. Click the leftmost switch and select scale factor from the pop-up menu.
5. Click scale fact = and enter 1.0.
6. Click contour.
7. Click data type = and select v. Mises Stress.
8. Click assign.
The default location for MARC to output stress values is at the Integration Points. The hmmarc
program takes these values and averages them to the centroid of each element. Therefore, the
most accurate representation of the stress values as they were reported from MARC can be
found with an assigned plot.

2. Click start with = and select inc 0, t=0.00.
3. Click end with = and select inc 107, t=100.
4. Click data type = and select v. Mises Stress.
6. Click transient.
HyperMesh calculates seven frames of animation showing the Displacements and v. Mises
Stress for each increment. In a non-linear analysis, this type of animation is necessary to view
the history of the stress development.

Notice that the Hypermesh results translator hmmarc in the present form can only handle results
files of the MARC Version K6.

General Interfacing with Crash Analysis Solvers -
HM-1100
This tutorial explains how to interface with crash analysis codes. New procedures include penetration
and time step checks and joint creation.

• Checking for penetration
• Fixing penetrations (2 methods)
• Creating joints.
• Checking the minimum time step.
administrator.
Checking for Penetration

The penetration panel is used to check contact interfaces for nodal penetrations. It allows you to
determine how much penetration is occurring and to correct the penetration by moving any
penetrating nodes.
The penetration panel supports all of the solver interfaces that contain card images and interface
elements. Before you use the penetration panel, element thicknesses and contact interfaces must
be defined for the current template loaded in the global panel. For more information on defining
thickness on collector cards, refer to the collectors panel in the Panels section of the on-line help.
For more information about creating contact interfaces, see the interfaces panel in the on-line help.

The penetration panel calculates penetration based on the following formula:
Ta/2 + Tb/2 - d = P
Where Ta and Tb are element and/or nodal thicknesses, d is the distance between the element
midplanes, and P is the amount of penetration. HyperMesh computes the penetration and checks on
a node by node basis, which allows the penetration, P, to vary throughout the model. Nodes with
negative penetration values are marked as non-penetrating nodes.
Contact directions (interface element normals) are not considered when determining if nodes are
penetrating the opposing contact face. Nodes are marked as failed regardless of the direction normal
to the contact elements. However, the calculated penetration does consider the normal direction.
This is discussed in more detail in the Fixing Penetrations section.
There are some limitations for penetration checking:
Two known penetration checking limitations

• Nodes that penetrate far enough through the thickness of the opposing surface so that the
thicknesses do not overlap at the nodal location (left diagram in above figure).
• Nodes that lie exactly normal to nodes on the opposing contact surface (right diagram in above
figure). Some of the nodes in the right diagram will be detected, however some of the nodes
will not be detected.
To retrieve the pene_dyna.hm file:

4. Select the pene_dyna.hm file.
5. Click retrieve.
6. Click return.
To specify the dyna.key template:

7. Select the ls-dyna/dyna.key file.
8. Click return.
To check for penetrations:
1. Select the penetration panel on the Tool page.

2. Click groups and select S2S_regular.
3. Click select.
The minimum distance between the two surfaces of elements in this group is 3.00, and the
thickness of each component is 9.00.
4. Click check.
All of the nodes that fail the penetration check are marked as temporary nodes, and the penetration
adjustment panel is displayed.
Fixing Penetrations
After a penetration check is completed, the penetration check adjustment subpanel is displayed.

Note: The penetration check adjustment panel can only be accessed after completing a
penetration check in the penetration panel.
The thickness value you enter in the penetration check adjustment subpanel specifies the element
thickness adjustment required to eliminate the penetration. The value in the thickness number field
can be set to scale or reduction. When you click recheck, it recalculates the penetration by either
scaling or by reducing the element thickness by the specified value. The amount of penetration
calculated when you use the recheck function is based on the following formulas:
for scale:
scale * (Ta/2 + Tb/2) – d = P
for reduction:
(Ta/2 + Tb/2) – d – reduction = P
The display mode can be set to temp nodes, vectors, or contour. The temp nodes mode displays
yellow temporary nodes at all node locations that failed the penetration check. The vectors mode
displays vectors in the direction and magnitude required to fix each penetrating node. You can
alternate the vector display between uniform size or magnitude %. The contour mode displays a
contour plot from zero to the maximum penetration.
The save penetrated option allows you to save the location of the penetration areas as well as the
magnitude and direction of the vectors required to fix the penetration areas. The saved entities can
be used in other HyperMesh panels to fix the penetration (see exercise two). The save penetrated
function creates a ^vectors collector that contains the saved vectors. The ^vectors collector can
be turned on and off by using the display panel.
The adjust function allows you to quickly fix penetrations by moving only the nodes that failed the
penetration check. When you click adjust, the penetrated nodes move in the direction and
magnitude of the vectors in the vectors display mode. Additional use of the adjust function
continues to translate the nodes in the same direction and magnitude. You must use this function
with discretion because the adjust function deforms the original model at the points of penetration
(shown in the next exercise).
After the adjust function has been applied, you can:
• Use reject to undo any modifications and remain in the penetration check adjustment panel
• Use abort to undo any modifications and return to the penetration panel
• Use return to accept the modifications and return to the penetration panel
The penetration checking calculation does not take into account the direction of the contact normals.
Nodes are marked as failed regardless of the direction the contact normals are pointing. However,
the computed direction and magnitude of the penetration does take into account the direction of the
contact normals. When the segment orientation option is on, the penetration check takes into
consideration the directions of contact normals when it calculates the amount of penetration (first
illustration below). The returned values represent the actual nodal penetration. When the segment

orientation option is off (second figure below), the penetration check does not take into account the
directions of element normals. Instead, the check calculates the amount of penetration as the
shortest distance required to move nodes so they do not lie within the region defined as the element
thicknesses. The returned values are the mathematical absolute amount of nodal penetration. It is
recommended that you leave the segment orientation option active unless all the vectors in the
vector display mode are pointing in the opposite direction needed to fix the penetration.
Segment orientation on with contact normals reversed
Segment orientation off with contact normals reversed
Once the amount of penetration is determined, the value is used to calculate the vector directions and
magnitudes required to fix the penetrating nodes. Surface to Surface and Single Surface contacts
create vector magnitudes equal to P/2 (the total penetration divided by 2). Node to Surface contacts
define vector magnitudes equal to P because only slave nodes are adjusted.

One method you can use to fix penetration areas is to use the translate panel to move the elements
the distance necessary to correct the penentration.
To correct penetration areas:
1. Click the switch under display mode and select vectors.

2. Activate the label vector check box.
3. Click the toggle under vectors and select uniform size.
4. Click uniform size = and enter 50.000 to make the vectors easier to view.
The vectors show the direction and magnitude required to fix the penetrations. The calculated
value for P is 6.00, so moving each surface in this surface to surface contact by P/2=3.00, will fix
the penetration problem.
5. Click the switch under save penetrated and select nodes & vect.
6. Click save penetrated to place the failed nodes in the user mark and to create vectors at all the
failed nodes. The vectors are placed in a ^vector collector that can be turned on and off in the
display panel. The vectors are created in the direction and magnitude required to fix the
penetration. They are located in the vectorcols subpage.
7. Click return.
8. Select the translate panel on the Tool page.
9. Select all the elements in the fl1 component:
- Click the input collector switch and select elems.
- Click elems and select by collector.
- Select the fl1 component.
- Click select.
10. Click the plane and vector collector switch and select vector.
11. Pick one of the vectors that point in the positive x direction.
12. Click magnitude = and enter 3.000
14. Click reset to clear the selected entities.
15. Select all of the elements in the fl2, light blue component.
- Click the input collector switch and select elems.

- Click elems and select by collector.
- Select the fl2 component.
- Click select.
16. Click translate -
17. Click return.
To delete the ^vector collector:

2. Click the input collector switch and select vectorcols.
3. Click vectorcols.
4. Select ^vector.
5. Click select.
6. Click delete.
Another method you can use to fix penetration areas is to use the adjust function in the penetration
check adjustment panel.
To fix penetration areas by using adjust:
1. Select the penetration panel on the Tools page.

2. Click groups.
3. Select the NS_reverse group.
4. Click select.
5. Click check.
6. Click the switch under displayed mode and select contour.
7. Click view in the permanent menu and select iso 1.
8. Pick one element on the screen to see the nodal penetration values associated to that element.
9. Click the left mouse button to turn off the penetration value display.
10. Click the switch under displayed mode and select vectors.

11. Click magnitude % = and enter 2000.
12. Click view in the permanent menu and select top.
Notice that the lengths of the vectors are dependent on the amount of penetration and are
pointing in the wrong direction.
13. Deactivate the segment orientation check box.
HyperMesh ignores which direction is normal to the contact.
14. Click adjust.
Note: The adjust function is an easy way to fix penetrations. However, using the adjust
function deforms your model at the areas of penetration, as is apparent when this
exercise is complete.
The pene-dyna.hm file contains other model components that may be useful for
trying the penetration checking/adjusting functions. These examples are not
included in the tutorial but are available for more practice. Use the display panel to
view the other collectors in the model.
Creating Joints
Joint definitions are created in the joints panel on the 1D page. HyperMesh 4.0 supports the
following standard joint types: Spherical, Revolute, Cylindrical, Planar, Universal, Translational, and
Locking. All of these types are stored as joint elements in the HyperMesh database. HyperMesh
also supports LS-DYNA3D’s *CONSTRAINED_JOINT_STIFFNESS_OPTION (Card 38) property to
define friction, damping, stop angles, etc. The LS-DYNA3D solver interface supports the creation of
joints in the joints panel. The PAMCRASH solver interface currently supports the creation of joints
as rod elements (see the PAMCRASH tutorial).
Note: A spherical joint consists of two coincident nodes. During analysis, the two coincident
nodes are forced to remain coincident but the bodies attached to each coincident node
are allowed to rotate freely about the joint location.
To retrieve the joints.hm file:

4. Select the joints.hm file.
5. Click retrieve.
6. Click return.
To load the dyna.key template:

5. Click return.
To activate coincident node picking:
1. Select the options panel in the permanent menu.

2. Select the modeling subpanel.
3. Activate the coincident node picking check box.
To change the display:
1. Select the display panel in the permanent menu.

2. Select the blue torus, orange torus, and New Joint collectors.
3. Deactivate any other collectors.
4. Click return.
To create a spherical joint:
1. Select the joints panel on the 1D page.

3. Click the switch under joint type and select spherical.
4. Left click once on a node in the center of both tori to bring up the coincident node picking window
(see figure below).
There are two nodes in the window, node 598 and node 1.
5. While holding down the left mouse button, drag the cursor over the node labeled 598.
The blue rigid body attached to this node is highlighted.
6. Release the left mouse button to select node 598.
7. Repeat the last three steps, but select node 1 from the coincident node picking window instead
of node 598.

8. Click create to generate the spherical joint element.
Note: A revolute joint consists of four nodes, two sets of two coincident nodes. During
analysis, all four of the revolute joint’s nodes remain at the same location with
respect to each other. The bodies attached to the nodes are free to rotate about the
axis that lies along the length of the revolute joint.
To change the display:
1. Select the display panel in the permanent menu.

2. Select the bearing, shaft, bearing rigids, shaft rigids, and New Joint collectors.
3. Deactivate the other collectors.
4. Click return.
To create a revolute joint:

1. Zoom in on one end of the shaft assembly (see figure below).
2. Click the switch under joint type and select revolute.
3. Left click once on a node at the center of one of the rigid link elements to bring up the coincident
node picking window (see figure below).
4. Select a node attached to a blue rigid link element.
If you depress the left mouse button while your cursor is over a node in the coincident node
picking window, the element attached to that node is highlighted.
5. Click at the same node location again and select the node attached to the orange rigid link
element.
6. Repeat the previous three steps on the opposing pair of blue and orange rigid link elements (see
figure below).
7. Click create.
See Also
Joints panel in the HyperMesh Panels On-line Help

Checking the Minimum Time Step
The time subpanel in the check elems panel calculates element time steps, based on the FEA
solver, and allows you to check for time steps that fall below a specified value. The ability to check for
the minimum time step is a new feature.
To retrieve the pene_dyna.hm file:

4. Select the pene_dyna.hm file.
5. Click retrieve.
6. Click return.
To specify the dyna.key template:

5. Click return.
To check the time steps:

2. Select the time subpanel.
3. Click check elems.

Dummy Positioning, Seatbelt Routing, and Control
Volumes - HM-1101L
This lesson continues with several exercises demonstrating general interfacing with crash analysis
codes.
• Dummy positioning
• Seatbelt routing
• Reviewing airbag design state
Dummy positioning
The dummy panel is located under the safety panel module. The dummy panel is used to position
any dummy model that contains a component hierarchy (a.k.a. tree structure) defined in HyperMesh .
The dynakey and pamcrash import translators can build the tree structure automatically when
importing supported dummy model files.
H-Point subpanel
Position and rotate the H-point

1. Select files on any of the main menu pages.
2. Activate the hm file radio button.
4. Select the dummy_position.hm file from…/altair/tutorials directory.
5. Click retrieve.
Load the dyna.key template in the files panel:
1. Select files on any of the main menu pages.

2. Activate the template radio button.
5. Click return to leave the files panel.

Turn off all entities except components and set the component display to shaded only:
1. Click on the only comps macro button found in the Display: group to turn off all entities except
for components.
2. Under the Display: macro button group, click on the per button next to gfx to turn on
performance graphics.
3. Under the vis panel, click on the shaded only icon, then the all button.
4. Click return to leave the vis panel.
5. Enter the dummy panel from the safety panel on the tool page.
6. Activate the H-point radio button to enter the H-point sub-panel.
7. Select any element on the dummy to select the entire dummy.
8. Under position: type –1.280, 0.350, and 0.284 in the x=, y=, and z= number fields
respectivly. The tab key can be used to cycle through the number fields.
9. Click position to move the H-point to the specified coordinates.
10. Under rotate+ set the N1, N2, N3 vector selection to y-axis and set increment = 24.00.
11. Click rotate- to set the rotation angle about the y-axis to –24.00 degrees.
Incremental Point subpanel
Adjusting Limb Positions

Adjusting limbs utilizes the incremental subpanel under the dummy panel. Internally, incremental
rotations are based on successive rotations about X, Y, then Z. These successive rotation values
are reflected in the current number fields. It is not required to rotate joints in order about their
local X, then Y, and then Z axis when using the interface in the dummy panel. There is no
limitation on the number of rotations nor the order of rotations. However, rotating out of sequence
will modify all rotation values reported in the X, Y, and Z current number fields to reflect
successive rotations.
To adjust the limb positions:
1. Activate the incremental radio button to enter the incremental sub-panel.

2. Enter 5.00 in the increment = number field.
3. Select any element in the lower left leg. HyperMesh follows the model hierarchy up to the
previous joint in the knee and down to the end of the hierarchy through the foot.
4. Click the <, decrement, next to yrot row five times to change the rotation of the left knee to –
25.0 degrees.
5. Select any element in the lower right leg and click the <, decrement, next to yrot row five times to
change the rotation of the right knee to –25.0 degrees.

6. Repeat this exercise to set the shoulders’ yrot to –40.0, elbows’ yrot to –65.0, and wrists’ xrot
to +/-10.0.
Seatbelt Routing
The seatbelt panel is located under the safety panel module. The seatbelt panel can be used to
create straight seatbelt segments as well as seatbelt segments that wrap around a dummy’s torso or
lap. The seatbelt panel also allows users to create 1D seatbelts or a combination of 1D and 2D
seatbelts.
Seatbelts panel
To create straight belt segments:
1. Retrieve the seatbelt.hm file from the …/altair/tutorials/hm/ directory (or skip this step and
continue with the Dummy Positioning tutorial).
− Select files on any of the main menu pages.
− Activate the hm file radio button.
− Click file = twice.
− Select the …/altair/tutorials/seatbelt.hm file.
− Click retrieve.
2. Set the component display to shaded only.
− Under the Display: macro button group, click on the per button next to gfx to turn on
performance graphics
− Under the vis panel, click on the shaded only icon, then the all button.
− Click return to leave the vis panel.
3. Enter the seatbelt panel from the safety panel on the tool page.
4. Select the view button on the permanent menu on the right side of the menu panels and select
the restore2 button.
5. Activate the yellow from node entity selection box and select the yellow retractor element (see
figure).
6. Select the upper, red slipring for the to node selection box (see figure).
7. Set element size= 0.100.
8. Click mesh. When components for the wrap around: selection have not been specified,
HyperMesh creates straight belt segments between the from node and two node nodes.

Seatbelt 1
To create belt segments that wrap around the chest:
1. Activate the yellow from node entity selection box and select the upper, red slipring element (see
figure).
2. Select the lower, red slipring element for the to node selection box (see figure).
3. Activate the comps selection box and select the components that compose the chest area.
− Click on the comps entity selection box twice to bring up the component list panel.
− Click on the comps entity selection box in the component list panel to bring up the entity
selection window.
− Select by assems to bring up the assembly list panel.
− Select the upper torso and lower torso assembly.
− Click return in the assembly list panel.
− Click return in the component list panel.
4. Click orient to create the belt line and enter belt orientation mode.
5. Move the mouse into the GUI area. While holding down the left mouse button, drag the mouse
cursor up and down to rotate the belt line about its endpoints.
6. When the belt is properly oriented, click mesh to create 1D elements along the belt line.
7. If a combination of 1D and 2D elements is desired. Click reject and set the 1D toggle to 1D/2D.
Seat belt width to the desired belt width around the 2D mesh. Set end length to distance
between the slipring and the start of the 2D elements along the belt line. The 1D and 2D element
placement fields are used to set separate current collectors for the two different types of
elements. Additional collectors can be created by hitting F-11 to jump to the collectors panel
within the seatbelts panel.

Seatbelt 2
To create belt segments that wrap around the lap:
The steps for creating belt segments that wrap around the lap are the same as the steps for wrapping
belts around the chest. The only difference is to select new end points as well as the lap components
instead of chest components .
1. Activate the yellow from node entity selection box and select the lower, red slipring element (see
figure).
2. Select the constraint on the floor for the to node selection box (see figure).
3. Activate the comps selection box and select the components that compose the lap.
− Click on the comps entity selection box twice to bring up the component list panel.
− Click on the comps entity selection box in the component list panel to bring up the entity
selection window.
− Select by assems to bring up the assembly list panel
− Select the upper torso and lower torso assembly.
− Click return to leave the assembly list panel.
− Click return to leave the component list panel.
4. Click orient to create the belt line and enter belt orientation mode.
5. Move the mouse into the GUI area. While holding down the left mouse button, drag the mouse
cursor up and down to rotate the belt line about its endpoints.
6. When the belt is properly oriented, click mesh to create 1D elements along the belt line.
7. If a combination of 1D and 2D elements is desired. Click reject and set the 1D toggle to 1D/2D.
Set belt width to the desired belt width around the 2D mesh. Set end length to distance
between the slipring and the start of the 2D elements along the belt line. The 1D and 2D element
placement fields are used to set separate current collectors for the two different types of
elements. Additional collectors can be created by hitting F-11 to jump to the collectors panel
within the seatbelts panel.

Seatbelt 3
To detach the seatbelts from the sliprings, retractor, and constraint:
The last step in the process is to detach the seatbelts from the sliprings, retractor, and constraint and
reattach the seatbelts to nodes that are coincident at these locations. This can be accomplished very
quickly in the detach panel.
1. Click return twice to leave the seatbelt panel and then the safety panel.
2. Enter the detach panel from either the 1D, 2D, or 3D pages.
3. Select all of the elements in the seatbelts collector.
− Click on the elems entity selection box to bring up the entity selection window.
− Select by collector to bring up the component list panel.
− Select the seatbelts collector.
− Click return to leave the component list panel.
4. Click detach.
Reviewing airbag design state

The control volumes panel is located under the safety panel module. The control volumes panel
can be used to create control volumes as well as review their design state.
To review the design state:
1. Retrieve the seatbelt.hm file from the …/altair/tutorials/hm/ directory (or skip this step and
continue with the Seatbelt Routing tutorial):
− Select files on any of the main menu pages.
− Activate the hm file radio button.
− Click file = twice.
− Select the …/altair/tutorials/seatbelt.hm file.
− Click retrieve.

2. Set the component display to shaded only:
− Under the Display: macro button group, click on the per button next to gfx to turn on
performance graphics
− Under the vis panel, click on the shaded only icon, then the all button.
− Click return to leave the vis panel.
3. Enter the control vol panel from the safety panel on the tool page.
4. Select the view button on the blue permanent menu on the right side of the menu panels and
select the restore2 button.
5. Click review.
6. Select cv1 from the control volume list.
7. Click return to leave the control vol panel. The display of the control volume will be set back to
its initial state.

LS-DYNA3D Interface - HM-1110-L
This tutorial explains how to use the HyperMesh interface with LS-DYNA3D.
• Load a pre-defined HyperMesh file
• Select the LS-DYNA3D template
• Create Control Cards for LS-DYNA3D
• Assign Element Types for LS-DYNA3D
• Define Materials with Components for LS-DYNA3D
• Define a HyperMesh Group: Sliding Interface for LS-DYNA3D
• Define a Rigid Wall for LS-DYNA3D
• Creating Boundary Conditions for LS-DYNA3D
• Create Time Histories for LS-DYNA3D
• Create a Cross Section for LS-DYNA3D
• Exporting a LS-DYNA3D data deck from HM
administrator.
Load a Pre-defined HyperMesh File

In this section, retrieve the model, rail-dyna.hm.
To retrieve a HyperMesh binary database:

3. Double-click file = and select rail-dyna.hm.
4. Click retrieve.
5. Click return.

Select the LS-DYNA3D Template
To use HyperMesh with a special solver, the template of this solver has to be loaded. This template
"knows" how to transform the binary HyperMesh database into a solver input deck. LS-DYNA3D has
three templates. The dyna.key supports the Keyword input format, the template dyna.seq supports
the sequential input format of LS-DYNA3D, and dyna.lrg supports the large format which is also a
sequential input format.
To load the LS-DYNA3D template:

2. Click template file = and select ls-dyna/dyna.lrg.
3. Click return.

Create Control Cards for LS-DYNA3D
This section explains how to create the control card of the CONTROL SECTION.
Note: The settings of the control cards influence the default values for defining materials.
To define the Title Card:
1. Select the cntl cards panel on the BCs page.

2. Click Title Card and enter the title string, “This is my first LS-DYNA example.
3. Click return.
To define the Control Cards:
1. Click Termination.
2. Click the data entry field under endtim and enter 10.
3. Click return.
4. Click TAURUS1.
5. Click the data entry field under the output intervall, PLTC, and enter 1.
6. Click return.
7. Click ASCII out I.
8. Enter values for SECFORC, RWFORC, NODOUT, GLSTAT and MATSUM :
- Click the text.
- Click the data entry field that appears under the text.
- Enter .1
This sets the output intervall for cross-section-, rigid-wall, nodal time history-, global statistic- and
material output.
9. Click return.
10. Click return.

Define Materials
Note: The material collector is used in the LS-DYNA3D interface. In contrast to PAM-CRASH,
LS-DYNA3D has separate material and cross section definitions. Once materials and
cross sections are defined, they can be combined in different property definitions. The
property collects the cross section and material data for a certain number of elements.
Elements and property are connected with the property ID in the element cards.
To define a Material Type 24 (Piecewise Linear Plasticity):

6. Click card image = and choose MATL24.
The template provides different material dictionaries. It supplies not only materials for shells and
bricks, but also materials for discrete elements like springs. To switch the material type, use the
card previewer.
8. Click the data entry field under RHO and enter 7.85e-6.
9. Click the data entry field under Comment and enter This is the side material.
2
10. Click the data entry field under E and enter 210 (in kN/mm ).
11. Click the data entry field under NU and enter 0.3.
If necessary, use the arrow buttons on the left side to scroll the screen.
12. Click SIGY, click the data entry field, and enter 0.37 to define the yield stress .
13. Click the button under array count and select 3.
This means that we are defining a stress-strain curve with 3 points.
14. Type the following pairs for strain (in EPS(i)) and stress (in ES(i)) : (0.0; 0.37), (0.02; 0.39), (0.04;
0.45).
15. Click return.
16. Click return.
To define a second steel Material Type 24 using loadcurves for the nonlinear behavior:
It is necessary to define the loadcurve first. After it is defined, it is possible to choose this loadcurve in
the material definition instead of using the method described in the first section.
1. Select the Post page.

2. Select the xy plots panel.
3. Select the plots panel.
4. Click plot = and enter Materialdata.

6. Click return.
To create a curve:
1. Select the edit curves panel.

2. Click plot = and select Materialdata.
3. Select the math option instead of file.
4. Click x= and enter {0.0, 0.02, 0.04} (including the brackets) as the value for the plastic strain.
5. Click y= and enter {0.37, 0.39, 0.45} (including the brackets) as the value for the effective stress.
6. Click create.
7. Click return.
8. Click exit.
Note: Once a loadcurve is defined, it can be used for the stress-strain behavior of a material, as
a load vs. time function, force-deflection function, or others.
To create and edit a material collector:

5. Click name = and enter steel2.
6. Click card image = and select MATL24.
8. Click Rho, click the data entry field, and enter 7.85e-6.
9. Click the data entry box under Comments and enter “This is the second definition.
2
10. Click the data entry field under E and enter 210 (in kN/mm ).
11. Click the data entry field under NU and enter 0.3.
If necessary, use the arrow buttons on the left side to scroll the screen.
12. Click the data entry field under SIGY and enter 0.37 to define the yield stress .
13. Double-click LCSS and pick curve1.

14. Double-click LCSR and pick curve1.
15. Click return.

16. Click return again.
Definition of Cross Section Properties for LS-DYNA3D

The cross section definition in LS-DYNA3D contains the element thickness, integration rule, and
element type. There are different types of cross sections; for example, shell section and beam
section.
The tutorial model has different thicknesses for the elements on the top and bottom and on the sides.
Therefore, you must create 2 cross section properties.
To define the first cross section property:

4. Click name = and enter side_prop.
6. Click card image and select SectShll.
9. Enter a comment for that property; for example, “Property of side elements.

10. Select NIP, click the data entry field, and enter 3. (This is the number of integration points
through the thickness.)
11. Click the data entry field under T1 and enter 1 (shell thickness).
12. Click return twice.
To define the second cross section property:

4. Click name = and enter top_prop.
5. Click card image and select SectShll.
6. Click material = and select steel2.
8. Click the data entry field under comment and enter Property of elements on the top
and bottom of the rail.
9. Click NIP, click the data entry field, and enter 3 for the number of integration points through the
thickness.
10. Click the data entry field below T1 and enter 2.5 (shell thickness).
11. Click return twice.
To create a new collector :

4. Click name = and enter topbottom.
5. Click card image = and select Part.
7. Click color and select color13.
9. Double-click SID and select top_props.
10. Click the data entry field under Comment and enter Elements on top and bottom of the
rail.
The number below ELFORM should be the same as in the ShellSectionProperty definition, which
is depicted below the comment. If it is not, change the value.
11. Click return.
12. Click return.

In the next steps, combine the elements with material and cross section data.
To reorganize the elements:

3. Click elems to access the extended entity selection menu.
4. Select by collector.
5. Select the tmp component.
6. Click select.
7. Click destination = topbottom.
8. Click move.
All elements that were previously in the tmp component are moved to the topbottom
component.
9. Click return.
12. Click comps and select the tmp component.
13. Click return.
14. Click delete.
The tmp component is deleted.
15. Click return.
To add a material and a ShellSection property to the side component:

4. Double-click name = and select side.
5. Click card image and select Part.
6. Click load/edit.
7. Double-click SID and select side_prop.
8. Click in the area below Comment and enter Elements on the side of the rail.
9. Note that the value below ELFORM is the same as the value for ELFORM in the Shell section
property (in this case in the property component side).
10. Click return.
11. Click return.

Define a HyperMesh Group: Sliding Interface for LS-
DYNA3D
This section describes how to define a sliding interface of type13. This is a single surface contact.
There are several methods you may use to select the contact elements. You can define a box that
encloses all the elements you want included in the contact definition or select the elements by
component, set, or entity.
In this section, define a multiple self-impacting contact of type 13.
To define the group:

3. Click name = and enter self_impact.
4. Click type = and select SingleSurface.
6. Click card image = and select SingleSurface.
7. Click interface color and select color 5.
9. Click the switch below options and select Automatic.
The contact type in the card previewer window changes to 13.
10. Click return.
To add the slave components:

2. Click the switch under slave and select comps.
You can specify the contact members by their component ID.
3. Click comps and select the components side and topbottom.
4. Click select.
5. Click update.
6. Click return.
In this section, define a master slave (element - node) contact of type 5.

3. Click name = and enter masterslave.
4. Click type = and select NodesToSurface.

5. Click card image = and select NodesToSurface.
7. Click the switch under Options and select Automatic.
8. Click return.
To add the master elements and slave nodes:

2. Click the switch under master and select entity.
3. Click the switch under slave and select entity.
4. Click elems and pick two arbitrary elements.
5. Click the upper add.
6. Click nodes and pick two arbitrary nodes.
7. Click the lower add.
8. Click return.
Define a Rigid Wall for LS-DYNA3D

In this section, create a rigid wall of type 4 with an infinite plate as the base node
(-1.00,0.0,0.00116).
To create a node as base node for the rigid wall:

3. Set x = -1.0, y = 0.0, and z = 0.00116.
5. Click return.
To create and define a rigid wall card:
1. Select the rigid walls panel on the BCs page.

3. Click name = and enter rwall1.
4. Click type = and select RWPlanar.
6. Click card image = and select RWPlanar.
7. Click rgdwall color and select color 12.
8. Click size = and enter 100.
This controls only the size of the displayed Rigid Wall on the screen.

To define the rigid wall type:
1. Click in the data entry field under FRIC and enter 0.3 for the friction coefficient.
2. Click return.
To define rigid wall geometry:
1. Select the geom subpanel.

2. Click name = and select rwall1.
3. Select the switch after shape and select plane.
4. Click the toggle to infinite.
5. Click the switch under normal vector and choose x-axis.
6. Click base node, and then pick the node you just created in the graphics area.
You may need to click f in the permanent menu to see the node.
7. Click update to create the rigid wall geometry.
To add slave nodes for rigid wall:

2. Click the switch under slaves and select nodes.
3. Click nodes and select by id.
4. Enter 1-21 after id = and press the ENTER key on the keyboard.
5. Delete the previous selection and enter node 1012 as input and press the ENTER key on the
keyboard.
6. Click add.
To add a motion to the rigid wall:
1. Select the motion subpanel.

2. Click the switch and select components.
3. Click x comp = and give 2000.0 as value.
4. Click the switch under type of motion and select velocity.
5. Click update.
To define attributes in the card previewer:
1. Select the card subpanel.

2. Click edit.
3. Click the data field under mass and enter 1.
4. Make sure that the IMSWF is switched off; then the velocity is defined as initial velocity and you
are able to specify the mass of the stonewall.
5. Click return.

6. Click return.
Note: The card previewer of the rigid wall changed accordingly to the definitions been made. If
the IMSWF is switched on in HyperMesh you can define the stonewall movement with a
loadcurve.
Creating Boundary Conditions for LS-DYNA3D

This exercise will show how to create boundary conditions to the model.

4. Click name = and enter bounc.
5. Click color and select color15.
6. Click create.
7. Click return.
To specify the load type:
1. Select the load types panel on the BCs page.

2. Click constraint = and choose BoundSPC.
All constraints that are now created will be displacement boundary conditions.
3. Click return.
To create constraints on nodes:
1. Turn off the display of groups:

- Click display on the permanent menu.
- Click the upper switch and select groups.
- Click none.
- Click return.
2. Select the constraints panel on the BC’s page.
4. Double-click nodes and select by id.
5. Enter 990-1011 as the node numbers.
6. Press ENTER on the keyboard.
7. Click create.
The constraints are now added to all nodes.
8. Click return.

Create Time Histories for LS-DYNA3D
For LS-DYNA3D, time histories for nodes and elements are available. For this exercise, you create
time histories for both. The method is the same for any type of time history you create.
To create a node time history card:
1. Turn off display of loads:

- Click the display panel from the permanent menu.
- Choose the switch next to groups and select loadcols.
- Click none.
- Click return to access the main menu.
2. Select the output block panel from the BC’s page.
3. Click name = and enter nodeth.
4. Make sure that nodes is the entity type, if not, use the toggle button to switch.
5. With your mouse, select a few nodes in the graphics area.
6. Click create.
The Time History for nodes is now created.
To create an element time history card:
1. Click name = and enter elemth.

3. Pick a few elements in the graphics area.
4. Click create.
To review time histories entities:
1. Click review.
2. Select elemth.
The entities associated with this time history are now highlighted.
1. Click card on the permanent menu.

2. Click the switch and select outputblocks.
3. Click elemth.
4. Click select.
5. Click edit.
The time history card is displayed as it will look in the output.
6. Click return.
7. Click return.

Cross Section Definition for LS-DYNA3D
To create a set of elements that consists of the elements which should belong to the cross
section:
1. Select entity sets menu on page BCs

2. Make sure that elems is depicted in the yellow area, if not use the toggle button to switch.
3. Click name= and enter cross_ele.
4. Select the elements which describe the cross section.
5. Click return.
To create the cross section.
1. Select the interfaces on page BCs.

2. Select the create menu.
3. Click name = and enter cross-sect1.
4. Click type = and select CrossSection.
5. Click card image and select CrossSection also.
6. Click create.
7. Select the add menu.
8. Use the toggle button below master: to select the selection type sets.
9. Click sets in the yellow area and select cross_ele.
10. Click select.
11. Click update.
12. Make sure that the selection type for the slaves is entity.
13. Click nodes and select the nodes with the mouse which describe the section.
14. Click add.
15. Click return.

Exporting a LS-DYNA3D Data Deck from HyperMesh
The exercise explains how to generate a LS-DYNA3D input deck from HyperMesh.
To export a LS-DYNA3D file:
1. Select files from the main menu.

2. Select the export sub-panel.
3. Make sure that the template = field still shows the dyna.lrg file.
4. Click filename = once, and enter the name of the LS-DYNA3D file you will create: rail.bdf
5. Click write.
HyperMesh writes the deck, and it displays a message once it is complete.

PAM-CRASH Interface - HM-1120L
This tutorial introduces the HyperMesh interface to PAM-CRASH. The HyperMesh PAM-CRASH
input translator supports the PAM-CRASH 97 cards and most PAM-CRASH 98 cards.
• Load a Prepared HyperMesh File
• Select the PAM-CRASH Template
• Create Control Cards
• Assign Element Types
• Define Materials with Component Dictionaries
• Define HyperMesh Groups: Sliding Interface
• Define a Rigid Wall
• Creating Boundary Conditions
• Create Time Histories
• Creating a Function
• Creating a Sensor Card
• Exporting a PAM-CRASH Data Deck from HyperMesh
administrator.
Load a Prepared HyperMesh File

A prepared model with elements and nodes is included in the /tutorials/hm/ directory. The file
name of the example is rail-dyna.hm. This is the basic example on which the tutorial is based.

4. Select the rail-dyna.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under
/tutorials/hm/.
HyperMesh returns to the files panel. Note that file = now displays the location of the rail-
dyna.hm file.
5. Click retrieve.

Select the PAM-CRASH Template

To use HyperMesh with a specific solver, the solver template must be loaded. This template
specifies how HyperMesh writes a solver input deck. PAM-CRASH has only one template.
To load the PAM-CRASH general template:

3. Select the general template, located in the HyperMesh installation directory under
/pamcrash/general/.
HyperMesh returns to the global panel. Note that template file = now displays the location of
the general template.
Create Control Cards for PAM-CRASH

This tutorial explains how to create the control card for the CONTROL SECTION of the PAM-CRASH
input deck.
Note: The settings of the control cards influence the default values for defining materials. No
PAM-CRASH deck can be executed without error if the control card CTRL is undefined.
To define the title card:
1. Select the cntl cards panel on the BC’s page.

2. Click Title and enter This is my first PAM-CRASH example.
3. Click return.

To define the control card:
1. Click Control.
2. Below TIME, enter the value 0.06.
3. Below TIOD, enter the value 0.005.
4. Below PIOD, enter the value 0.005.
5. Click the box below MORE and select 1 from the pop-up menu.
6. Click return.
To define the file optional keyword:
1. Click File Name.

2. Below FILENAME, enter rail-dyna.hm.
3. Click return.
To define the time step optional keyword:
1. Click next.
2. Click Time Step.
3. Click the switch below Shell Criteria and select LARGE from the pop-up menu.
4. Click the switch below Thickness Term and select BEND from the pop-up menu.
Assign Element Types for PAM-CRASH

HyperMesh allows you to specify how different element types are defined in the solver deck. For
example, a quad4 can be a SHELL or a MEMBR element. The tria3 element can be a TRIA_C,
SHELL, or MEMBR element. The tetra4, the penta6, and the hexa8 elements define the SOLID
elements of PAM-CRASH.
To assign the element type:
1. Select the elem types panel on the 1-D page.

2. Click quad4 = and select SHELL from the pop-up menu.
3. Click elems and select all from the extended entity selection menu.
4. Click update.

To edit the SHELL card properties in the card previewer:

2. Click the upper left switch and select elems from the extended entity selection menu.
3. Click config = and select quad4 from the pop-up menu.
4. Click type = and select SHELL from the pop-up menu.
5. Select any displayed element and click edit.
The SHELL card now appears in the card previewer. The number of integration points through
the thickness NINT and the optional thickness T are defined here. If no thickness is entered, the
thickness of the material defined in the component is used.
Define Materials with Component Dictionaries for PAM-

CRASH
Each PAM-CRASH material card MAT or MATER requires one component.
Note: The material collector is not used in the PAM-CRASH interface. PAM-CRASH does not
differentiate between material data and cross section data as other solvers do.
Consequently, elements have no reference to materials, which only belong to a
component. The material definition for the elements is included with this component.
Elements are located in a component (beam, bar, joint, shell). The template takes the component ID
as material ID. The card image type of the collector defines the material as 1-D material, 2-D
material, or 3-D material.
To define a Material Type 102 for collector side:

3. Click the switch and select comps from the pop-up window.
4. Click name = twice and select side.
5. Click card image = and select MAT_2D from the pop-up menu.

Note: The template provides MAT_1D, MAT_2D, and MAT_3D dictionaries. Material types
from 200 to 230 are defined with MAT_1D. Materials types from 100 to 151 are defined
with MAT_2D. Material types from 1 to 41 are defined with MAT_3D. To switch the
material type, use the card previewer.
6. Click load/edit.
7. Click the switch below Material Type and select Type 102 from the pop-up menu.
Note: Only the materials of the current dictionary (1-D, 2-D, 3-D) can be selected. The ID of
the material is given by HyperMesh with the component ID.
8. Below density, enter the value 7.85e-9.

Note: You can use the TAB or SHIFT TAB key on the keyboard to go to the next or previous
edit field.
9. Below TITLE, enter This is the side material.

10. Below E, enter the value 20000.
11. Below Yield, enter the value 250.
12. Below v, enter the value 0.3.
13. Below t, enter the value 2.
14. Click return.
To define a Material Type 102 for collector topbottom:

2. Click name = and enter topbottom.
3. Click the switch below creation method: and select same as from the pop-up menu.
4. Click same as = and select side.
5. Click color and select Color 10 from the pop-up menu.
All attributes of the card image from the side material are automatically copied into the current
component.

7. Below t, enter the value 2.5.
8. Below Title, enter This is the topbottom material.
9. Select LARGE_FMT.
Note: The card previewer of the components allows you to change between the MAT and the
large material format MATER.

Note: The created component topbottom now is empty. We will now move the elements of
the component tmp into the component topbottom.
To reorganize the elements:
1. Select the organize panel on any main menu page.

3. Click elems and select by collector from the extended entity selection menu.
4. Select tmp.
5. Click select.
6. Click destination = and select topbottom.
7. Click move.
All elements of the component tmp are moved to the component topbottom. Note that the color
of the elements has changed from orange to green.
8. Click return.

To delete the component tmp:

2. Click the switch and select comps from the extended entity selection menu.
3. Click comps and select tmp.
4. Click return.
5. Click delete entity.
The component tmp is now deleted.
Define HyperMesh Groups: Sliding Interface for PAM-

CRASH
This tutorial describes how to define a self contacting sliding interface (type 26). A second interface
is defined only for tutorial purposes.
The procedure below explains how to define a type 26 self contacting sliding interface.

3. Click name = and enter self_impact.
4. Click type = and select SLINT26 from the pop-up menu.
Note that the card image is updated simultaneously.
Note: It is possible to define various types of sliding interfaces. All of them, except the
SLINT42, are written as a SLINT / card. The SLINT42 type is written as the PAM 98
SLINT2/ card.
5. Click interface color and select Color 6.

7. Below SLFACM, enter the value 1.0.
8. Select Comment.
9. Below Comment, enter This is the selfimpact interface.
10. Click return.
To add the slave components:

2. Click name = twice and select self_impact.
3. Click the switch below slave: and select comps from the pop-up menu.
4. Click comps twice and select side and topbottom.
5. Click return.

6. Click update.
If update is not clicked, no changes to the previous definition are made. No changes are made to
the graphics window, because the master and slave component list is not displayed.
Note: If you edit this interface with the card previewer, the master and slave set and component
definition are not shown; however, they are still defined in the add subpanel.
The procedure below explains how to define a type 34 master slave (element - node) contact.

3. Click name = and enter masterslave.
4. Click type = and select SLINT34 from the pop-up menu.

Note that the card image is updated simultaneously.
5. Click interface color and select Color 13.
7. Below SLFACM , enter the value 1.0.
8. Click return.
To add the master elements and slave nodes:

Note: The add subpanel now appears with different options. The template specifies what group
type is available with the different interfaces, such as SLINT26 or with SLINT34.
Possibilities are: (1) master and slave elements, (2) master elements and slave nodes,
(3) slave elements, and (4) slave nodes.
2. Click the switch below master: and select entity from the pop-up menu.
3. Click the switch below slave: and select entity from the pop-up menu.
4. After master:, click elems to highlight the box with the blue input cursor.
5. Select two elements on the model.
6. Click the upper right add.
7. After slave:, click nodes to highlight the box with the blue input cursor.
8. Select two nodes on the model.

9. Click the lower right add.
You should now see the master elements (elements with x) and the slave nodes (S) displayed on
the model.
Define a Rigid Wall for PAM-CRASH

This tutorial explains how to define a type 4 infinite rigid wall with a base node at -1.00, 0.0, 0.00116.
To create a base node for the rigid wall:

3. After X =, enter the value –1.0.
4. After Y =, enter the value 0.0.
5. After Z =, enter the value 0.00116.

To create and define the rigid wall card:
1. Select the rigid walls panel on the BCs page.

4. Click type = and select RIGWA from the pop-up menu.
Note: You can switch between the PAM 97 RIGWA and the PAM 98 RWALL card by choosing
different types: RIGWA or RWALL.
5. Click rgdwall color and select Color 12.

6. Click size = and enter the value 100.
This specifies the display size of the rigid wall.
7. Click create.
To define rigid wall geometry:

2. Click name = twice and select rwall1.
3. Click the switch after shape = and select plane from the pop-up menu.
4. Click the toggle after shape = and select infinite.
5. Click the switch below normal vector: and select x-axis from the pop-up menu.
6. Click base node to highlight the box with the blue input cursor.
7. Select the created node in the graphics area.
You may need to click f on the permanent menu to see the node.
8. Click update.
The rigid wall is now shown in the graphics area.
To add slave nodes for the rigid wall:

2. Click the switch below slaves: and choose nodes from the pop-up menu.
3. Click nodes twice and select by id from the extended entity selection menu.
4. Enter the value 1-21.
Note that 21 nodes at the interface of the rail and the rigid wall are highlighted. Also note that
one of the nodes was not selected.
5. Click the node that was not highlighted.
or
Enter the value 1012 in the by id field.
6. Click add.
The selected nodes are now set as slaves.

To add motion to the rigid wall:
1. Select the motion subpanel.

2. Click the switch below name = and select components from the pop-up menu.
3. Click x comp = and enter the value 1.0.
4. Click the switch below type of motion: and select velocity from the pop-up menu.
5. Click update.

To define attributes in the card previewer:

2. Click the switch and select groups from the extended entity selection menu.
3. Click groups and select rwall1.
4. Click return.
5. Click edit.
6. Click the switch below Friction type flag and select no sliding from the pop-up menu.
7. Click the switch below Rigid Wall Descriptor – Plane Type and select Type 4 from the pop-up
menu.
Note: The card previewer of the rigid wall changed according to the definitions made. Now it is
possible to define the mass and the initial velocity for moving rigid wall with finite mass.

8. Below Mass, enter the value 1.
9. Below Vinit, enter the value 2000.0.
Creating Boundary Conditions for PAM-CRASH

This tutorial explains how to create model boundary conditions.

3. Click the switch after collector type: and select loadcols from the pop-up menu.
4. Click name = and enter bounc.
5. Click the switch below creation method: and select card image from the pop-up menu.
The card image field should be blank.
6. Click color and select Color 15 from the pop-up menu.
7. Click create.
The header bar now displays bounc as the current loadcol.
1. Select the load types panel from the BCs page.

2. Click constraint = and choose BOUNC from the pop-up menu.
All constraints that are now created will be displacement boundary conditions.
To create constraints on nodes:
1. Select the display panel on the permanent menu

2. Click the upper right switch and select groups from the pop-up menu.
3. Click none.
The display of groups is now off.

5. Select the constraints panel from the BCs page.
7. Click nodes and select by id from the pop-up menu.
8. Enter the value 990-1011.
10. Click create.
The constraints are now added to the nodes.
Create Time Histories for PAM-CRASH

For PAM-CRASH, time histories may be defined for nodes, elements, and local coordinate systems.
For this exercise, you will only create time histories for some nodes and elements. The operation is
the same for any type of time history that is created.
1. Select the display panel on the permanent menu

2. Click the upper right switch and select loadcols from the pop-up menu.
3. Click none.
The display of loads is now off.

4. Click return.
5. Select the output block panel from the BCs page.
6. Click name = and enter node_thp.
7. Click the switch and select nodes from the pop-up menu.
8. Use the mouse to select a few nodes in the graphics area.
9. Click create.
The time history for nodes is now created.
1. Click name = and enter elem_thp.

3. Use the mouse to select a few elements in the graphics area.
4. Click create.
1. Click review.
2. Select elem_thp.
The entities associated with this time history are highlighted.
To view the time history card image:

2. Click the switch and select outputblocks from the pop-up menu.
3. Click outputblocks.
4. Select elem_thp.
5. Click return.
6. Click edit.
The time history card is displayed as it will look in the output.

Create a Function
This section describes how to generate curves, which corresponds to the function cards FUNCT and
LOCUR in PAM-CRASH. This curve should serve as a function for a logical sensor switching on and
off. At time=0, the sensor is on, at time=0.01 the sensor is switched off.
To create a curve:
1. Select the xy plots panel from the Post page.

2. Click plots.
3. Click plot = and enter sensor.

5. Click return.
6. Click edit curves.
8. Click plot = and select sensor.
9. Select math.
10. After x =, enter {0, 0.01, 0.1}.
11. After y =, enter {1, 0, 0}.
12. Click create.
13. Click return.

14. Click exit to access the main menu.
Create a Sensor Card

Sensors are implemented as properties in HyperMesh. In this example we refer to the curve defined
in the preceding Help topic.
To define a PAM-CRASH sensor:
1. Select the safety panel from the 2-D page.

2. Select the sensor subpanel.
3. Click name = and enter sensor.
4. Click card image = and select SENSOR from the pop-up menu.

6. Select COMMENT.
7. Below Comment, enter This is a logical function sensor.
8. Click the switch below Sensor type and select logical function switch from the pop-up menu.
9. Click LCS twice and select curve1.
Exporting a PAM-CRASH Data Deck from HyperMesh

This tutorial explains how to generate a PAM-CRASH input deck from HyperMesh.
To export a PAM-CRASH file:

The template = field must show the pamcrash/general file.
3. Click filename = and enter rail.pc.
rail.pc is the PAM-CRASH file you will create.
4. Click write.
HM writes the deck. A message in the header bar will indicate when the process is completed.

RADIOSS Interface - HM-1130-L
This tutorial introduces the use of the RADIOSS 3.1 template when creating models for crash
analyses.
• Creating and Defining Components, Materials and Properties
• Creating and Defining Interface Elements for RADIOSS
• Create and Define a Rigid Wall Entity
• Creating Boundary Conditions for RADIOSS
• Creating Time Histories for RADIOSS
• Creating and Editing Control Cards for RADIOSS
• Exporting a RADIOSS Data Deck from HM
administrator.
See Also
Applying Boundary Conditions in Tutorial HM-550
Structuring the HyperMesh Database - HM-100
The HyperMesh - PAM-CRASH Interface - HM-1120
Creating and Defining Components, Materials, and

Properties
When starting a new model, typically you need to organize a model by components, material, and
property data. This tutorial demonstrates how to organize a model by defining RADIOSS material
and property cards and also shows how those can be associated with components.
A prepared model with elements and nodes is included in the /tutorials/hm/ directory. The file
name of the example is rail_crash.hm. This is the basic example on which the tutorial is based.

4. Select the rail_crash.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under
/tutorials/hm/.

rail_crash.hm file.
5. Click retrieve.
rail_crash.hm.
To load the RADIOSS template:

3. Select the radioss31.fix template, located in the HyperMesh installation directory under
/radioss/radioss31.fix/.
HyperMesh returns to the global panel. Note that template file = now displays the location of
the radioss31.fix template.
To define material data:

3. Click the switch after collector type: and select mats from the pop-up menu.
4. Click name = twice and select steel.
5. Click card image = and select MLAW2 from the pop-up menu.
This is the RADIOSS material.
6. Click load/edit.
7. Below Title, enter steel.

8. Below RHO_1, enter the value 7.8e-06.
This is the density.
9. Below E, enter the value 2e5.
This is the Young’s modulus.
10. Below nu, enter the value .3.
This is the Poissons’ ratio.
The material properties are now edited.
11. Click return to access the collectors panel.
The material data is now defined.
Material card – RADIOSS MLAW2.
To create and define property data:

2. Click the switch after collector type: and select props from the pop-up menu.
3. Click name = and enter rail_prop.
4. Click the switch below creation method: and select card image from the pop-up menu.
5. Click card image = and select SectSHEL from the pop-up menu.
The RADIOSS property is now selected.
Note: It is not necessary to specify material in this panel when using the RADIOSS template.
7. Below Title, enter rail property.
8. Below Thick, enter the value 1.0.
The property data is now defined.
9. Click return to access the collectors panel.
Property card – RADIOSS SectSHEL.

To define components:

2. Click the switch after collector type: and select comps from the pop-up menu.
3. Click name = twice and select rail.
4. Click card image = and select Part from the pop-up menu.
5. Click load/edit.
Note: Although not a RADIOSS card, this allows you to control which property is associated
with a component. RADIOSS does not have a component concept such as HyperMesh,
so this “card was created to bridge the gap. This card will not be output, but element
data associated with this component will reflect the MATNUM (material ID) and IPID
(property ID) shown here.
6. Click IPID twice and select rail_prop.

This selects the property that was created and defined earlier.
The component data is now defined.
Component card for RADIOSS.
Creating and Defining Interface Elements for RADIOSS

This tutorial shows how to create interface elements that define the RADIOSS interface cards.
Interface elements are for defining where contact or possible contact can occur on a model.
To create and define interface entities:
1. Select the interfaces panel on the BC’s page.

3. Click name = and enter int1.
This is a name for the interface.
4. Click type = and select ELEMtoELEM from the pop-up menu.
5. Click interface color and select Color 9 from the pop-up menu.
7. Click the box below Itype and select 7 from the pop-up menu.
This defines RADIOSS interface type 7. You may also enter in other values pertaining to this
interface, but this example uses the default values.
Note: HyperMesh currently only allows surface input types 1 or 5 for RADIOSS.

Interface card – RADIOSS ELEMtoELEM.
8. Click return to access the interfaces panel.

We will now add master elements to the model.
10. Click name = twice and select int1.
11. Click the switch below master and select entity from the pop-up menu.
Note: For the RADIOSS template, only entity, sets, or all are valid for element definitions.
12. Click the upper elems box and select all from the extended entity selection menu.
You can also select elements individually or with any other option on the extended entity selection
menu.
13. Click the upper right add.
Master interface elements are created on each structure element.
We will now add slave elements to the model.
14. Click the switch below slave and select entity from the pop-up menu.
15. Click the lower elems box twice and select all from the extended entity selection menu.
16. Click the lower right add.
Slave interface elements are created on each structure element.
Note: Slave and master elements are added to all structure elements in order to define the
model for self contact.

Slave and master interface elements.
Create and Define a Rigid Wall Entity

This tutorial demonstrates how to create and define a rigid wall entity for RADIOSS.
To create and define a rigid wall:
1. Select the rigid walls panel on the BC’s page.

We will now create and define the rigid wall card.
4. Click type = and select RigidWall from the pop-up menu.
5. Click rgdwall color and select Color 13 from the pop-up menu.
This controls the size of the displayed rigid wall on the screen when it is created.
7. Click create.
The rigid wall group is now created.
We will now define the rigid wall geometry.
9. Ensure that rwall1 is displayed after name =.
10. Click the upper right switch and select plane from the pop-up menu.
11. Click the toggle and select infinite.

12. Click the switch below normal vector: and select x-axis from the pop-up menu.
13. Press F8 on the keyboard to select the create nodes panel.
14. Create a node at (900,0,0).
15. Click return to access the rigid walls panel.
16. Click base node to highlight the box with the blue input cursor.
17. Select the created node in the graphics area.
You may need to click f on the permanent menu to see the node.
18. Click update.
The rigid wall geometry is now created.
We will now add slave nodes for the rigid wall.
20. Click the switch below slaves and select nodes from the pop-up menu.
Note: Only nodes, sets, or all are supported for the RADIOSS template.
21. Click the yellow nodes box twice and select all from the extended entity selection menu.
22. Click add.
We will now edit the RADIOSS rigid wall card.
Rigid wall.

23. Select the card subpanel.
24. Ensure rwall1 is displayed after name =.
25. Ensure that RigidWall is displayed after card image =.
26. Click edit.
27. Below Xm, enter the value 900.
28. Below Ym, enter the value 0.0.
29. Below Zm, enter the value 0.0.
These are the coordinates of the base point that was used to create the rigid wall.
30. Below Xm1, enter the value 901.
31. Below Ym1, enter the value 0.0.
32. Below Zm1, enter the value 0.0.
The above values are the direction of the normal.
RADIOSS rigid wall card.
Creating Boundary Conditions for RADIOSS

This tutorial shows how to create boundary conditions on the model.

3. Click the switch after collector type: and select loadcols from the pop-up menu.
4. Click name = and enter load1.
5. Click color and select Color5 from the pop-up menu.
6. Click create.
Note: There are no card images associated with loadcols for the RADIOSS template.

1. Select the load types panel on the BC’s page.

2. Click velocity = and select PrcrcbVel from the pop-up menu.
All velocities now created are initial velocities.
Load types panel.
Note: PrcrcbVel is prescribed velocity.
To create velocities on nodes:

2. Click the upper right switch and select groups from the pop-up menu.
3. Click none.
The display of groups is now turned off.
5. Select the velocities panel on the BC’s page.
7. Click view on the permanent menu and select left.
The left side of the model is displayed.
9. Use the mouse to draw a window around the nodes on the far left end of the rail.
11. Click magnitude = and enter the value 1000.
12. Click the lower left switch and select x-axis from the pop-up menu.
13. Click create.
The velocity is now added to all nodes.

Velocities on end of rail.
Create Time Histories for RADIOSS

For RADIOSS, time histories for nodes, elements, skew frames, interfaces, and materials are
supported. For this tutorial, you will only create time histories for some nodes and elements.
Operation is the same for any type of time history that is created.

2. Click the upper right switch and select loadcols from the pop-up menu.
3. Click none.
The display of loads is now off.
5. Select the output block panel on the BC’s page.
6. Click name = and enter nodeth.
7. Use the mouse to select a few nodes in the graphics area.
8. Click create.
The time history for nodes is now created.

1. Click name = and enter elemth.

3. Use the mouse to select a few elements in the graphics area.
4. Click create.
1. Click review.
2. Select elemth.
The entities associated with this time history are now highlighted.
To view a time history card image:

2. Click the switch and select outputblocks from the pop-up menu.
3. Click outputblocks.
4. Select elemth.
5. Click select.
6. Click edit.
The time history card is now displayed as it will look in the output.
RADIOSS element time history card.

Creating and Editing Control Cards for RADIOSS
For RADIOSS, some control cards are generated automatically, such as CARD 2.7 – NUMBER OF
ELEMENTS, so it may not be necessary for you to view every control card. This tutorial only shows a
couple of control cards in order to describe the procedure.
To view and edit a control card:
1. Select the cntl cards panel on the BC’s page.
RADIOSS control cards.
2. Click HeaderCard.
3. Below RUNAME, enter a name for the file.
4. Click return.
Repeat this procedure for any other cards you wish to update.
RADIOSS header card.
To reset a control card:
1. Click delete.
2. Select the control card you want to reset.
The card changes colors from green to grey.
To suppress control card data from being written:
1. Click disable.
2. Select the control card you wish to suppress.
The color changes from green to red.
To reactivate the control card:
1. Click enable.
2. Select the card you want to restore.
The color changes from red back to green.

To define a control card in order to export a RADIOSS file:
1. Click TimeHistory_1.
Exporting a RADIOSS Data Deck from HyperMesh

This tutorial explains how to generate a RADIOSS input deck from HyperMesh.
To export a RADIOSS file:

3. Ensure that template = shows radioss31.fix.
4. Click filename = and enter the name of the RADIOSS file you want to create.
5. Click write.
HyperMesh writes the deck, and displays a message when it is complete.
File export.

DYTRAN Interface - HM-1140-L
This tutorial introduces the MSC-DYTRAN interface for Altair HyperMesh pre-processor. The
DYTRAN interface supports version 4.x.

• Converting a NASTRAN formatted data deck file into a DYTRAN data deck
• Applying DYTRAN boundary conditions
• Creating CONTACT definitions
• Defining the file management, executive control, and case control sections
Converting a NASTRAN Data Deck into a DYTRAN Data

Deck.
This tutorial imports a NASTRAN deck and updates the model format to DYTRAN.
1. Select files on the main menu.
4. Select the nastran.exe translator.
5. Double-click filename =.
6. Select the tutorial file spring_nast.dat.
7. Click import.
To change the current template to the DYTRAN/general template:
Note: All NASTRAN entities written out with the DYTRAN/general template are automatically
formatted into DYTRAN cards.
1. Remain in the files panel.

4. Select the dytran/general template.

To apply the TLOAD1 load collector card image to load collectors containing forces, moments,
and pressures:
Note: Applying the TLOAD1 card images to load collectors containing SPCs will not cause a
problem. If a load collector referenced by a TLOAD1 card image contains only SPCs, the
TLOAD1 card will not be written out for that collector.
1. Select the collectors panel on the main menu.
3. Change collector type to loadcols.
4. Click card image =.
5. Select the TLOAD1 card image.
6. Click load.
7. Activate the forces check box.
8. Click select.
Applying DYTRAN Boundary Conditions

Use the edit curves panel to read the curve data from the tutorial file dytran_xydata.dat.
1. Select the xy plots panel from the Post page on the main menu.
2. Select the edit curves panel.
4. Activate the x = and file radio buttons.
6. Select the tutorial file dytran_xydata.dat file.
7. Activate the y = and file radio buttons.
8. Click comp =.
9. Select the Column 2 data component.
10. Click create.
12. Select the curve attribs panel.
13. Click auto color to color the create curve.
14. Click return to exit the edit curves panel.
15. Click exit to leave the xy plots panel.
The curve attribs panel can also be use to modify the curve color, markers, etc. Please see the
curve attribs panel in the Panels on-line help for more information.

To card edit the forces load collector to apply the loading curve and set the set number:
1. Select card from the permanent menu.

2. Click the entity switch next to the yellow selection box.
3. Select loadcols from the pop-up list.
4. Click on the yellow loadcols entity selection box.
5. Activate the forces check box.
6. Click select.
7. Click edit.
To set the TLOAD1 TID field to curve1:
1. Click the yellow TID field on the TLOAD1 card image.

2. Click the yellow TID entity selection box twice.
3. Select curve1 from the list of available curves.
4. Click return to save the changes and leave the TLOAD1 card image.
To change the FORCE load types to DAREA in the load types panel:
1. Select the load types panel from the BCs page on the main menu.
2. Click the force = button.
3. Select DAREA from the list of load types.
4. Click on the yellow loads entity selection box.
5. Select displayed from the pop-up window.
6. Click update.
7. Click return.
Creating CONTACT Definitions
To create a SINGLE_SURF type interface in the interfaces panel.
1. Select interfaces on the BCs page.

3. Click name = and enter a name to label the contact.
4. Click type = and select SINGLE_SURF from the pop-up menu.
5. Click interface color and select a color.
6. Click create to create the interface group.

To add the elements in the shell_elems collector to the slave surface of the group:
1. Select the add subpanel on the interfaces panel.

2. Click elems and select displayed from the pop-up menu.
3. Click add to add the elements to the slave surface.
Changing the slave type in the add subpanel changes the STYPE field on the DYTRAN CONTACT
card. When type is set to entity, STYPE on the CONTACT card changes to SURF. When type is
comp, STYPE becomes PROP. When type is set and only one set has been selected, STYPE is
ELEM but STYPE is SURF if more than one set has been selected. When STYPE is SURF, a
SURFACE card will be written out with the CONTACT card when the model is exported.
To set the attributes on the CONTACT card image.
1. Select the card image subpanel on the interfaces panel

2. Click edit.
3. Change field values on the CONTACT card by clicking on the yellow field header and entering a
new value.
4. Click return to save the changes and exit the card image
5. Click return to exit the interfaces panel.
Defining the File Management, Executive Control and Case

Control Sections
To create an output block of all the elements contained in the shell_elems collector:
1. Select output block from the BCs page on the main menu.
2. Click name = button and enter shells to set the DYTRAN output results filename to shells for the
selected entities.
4. Select by collector from the pop-up menu.
5. Activate the check box next to the shell_elems collector.
6. Click select.
7. Click create.
To card edit the created output block to define the output request parameters for the shell
elements:

2. Click the outputblocks entity selection box.
3. Activate the check box next to the shells output block.
4. Click select.
5. Click edit.

6. Activate the SAVE, TIMES, and ELEMENTS check boxes.
7. Click once in the text field next to TIMES(shells).
8. Enter 0 THRU END BY 1.e-5.
9. Click once in the text field next to ELOUT(shells).

10. Enter EFFST01,EFFST02,EFFST03,EFFPL01,EFFPL02,EFFPL03.
11. Click return to save the changes and exit the card editor.
To create an output block of all the nodes in the model:
1. Select output block from the BCs page on the main menu.
2. Click name = and enter grids to set the DYTRAN output results filename to nodes for the
selected entities.
4. Select displayed from the pop-up menu.
5. Click create.
To card edit the created output block to define the output request parameters for the nodes:

2. Click the outputblocks entity selection box.
3. Activate the check box next to the grids output block.
4. Click select.
5. Click edit.
6. Activate the SAVE, TIMES, and NODES check boxes.
7. Click once in the text field next to TIMES(nodes).
8. Enter A0 THRU END BY 1.e-5.
9. Click the text field next to GPOUT(nodes).

10. Enter XVEL,YVEL,ZVEL,XDIS,YDIS,ZDIS.
13. Click return to exit the output blocks panel
To use the cntl cards panel to set the TITLE, ENDTIME, ENDSTEP, SPC, and PARAM cards:
1. Select cntl cards from the BCs page on the main menu.
2. Click the TITLE control card button.
3. Click the text field next to TITLE = and enter a title.
5. Click the ENDTIME control card button.

6. Click the number field next to ENDTIME and enter a termination time.
8. Click the SPC control card button.
9. Click the number field next to SPC and enter 2.
11. Click the PARAM control card button.
12. Activate the check box next to INISTEP.
13. Activate the check box next to MINSTEP.
15. Click return to exit the control cards panel.
The element and material properties were already set in the imported NASTRAN deck and are
retained when exporting the DYTRAN deck. The element and material properties can be modified by
card editing the shell_elems component and the steel material collectors, respectively.

Using Composites Panel - HM-1300
The composites panel aligns the element material angle of a mesh of shell elements with a selected
direction or coordinate system. This material angle is used in different analysis codes to define
composites, anisotropic materials, or stress output request directions. You can also review the
material angle directions to verify that they have been set correctly. You can choose to have the
material angles displayed either as vectors or as continuous lines that follow the 0-degree direction
within each element.

• Assigning the orientation angle to the element card
• Assigning an orientation vector to the elements by using a vector
• Assigning an orientation vector to the elements by using an angle
• Reviewing Ply Directions
Assigning the orientation angle to the element card

A valid analysis template must be selected for the composites panel to function properly.
Currently, valid analysis templates include:
• Nastran
• LS-Dyna
• Ansys
To use the composites panel to assign the orientation angle, system or vector to the element
card:
1. Retrieve the HM database file named composites.hm.

2. Load the nastran\general template using the files\template panel.
To update all the elements to the correct element types for nastran:
1. Go to the elem types panel on the 2D page.

2. Click on the elems button and select all.
3. Click update to update the element types.
Note: For visualization purposes, HyperMesh projects the local x-axis of the selected system
onto the face of the shell elements. How each analysis code interprets this information
varies.
To assign the material direction using the system ID:
1. Select the elem orientation subpanel from the composites panel on the 2-D page.
2. Indicate the elements that you want to assign material angles to.
3. Select elems, by collector, white and select.
4. Click the Element orientation method: switch and select by system ID.

5. Select system and enter ID = 1.
6. Click color and select the display color of the review vectors or lines.
7. Click size = and enter a value that specifies, in model units, how large the review vectors are
when displayed.
8. Activate join lines if you want to display connected lines instead of review vectors to represent 0-
degree ply directions.
9. Click assign.
To Undo:
1. Click reject immediately after clicking assign.

Note: The selected elements are re-assigned to the global coordinate system (id = 0) and the
panel is reset. This function assigns the ID of the coordinate system to the selected
elements. How each analysis code interprets this information varies. For visualization
purposes, HyperMesh projects the local x-axis of the selected system onto the face of the
shell elements. If you later modify the system, the element material directions change
implicitly.
To assign an orientation vector to the elements by using a system axis:

1. Select the composites panel from the 2D page.
2. Select the elems, by collector, red component and select.
3. Select the global coordinate system by vector under Element Orientation Method:
4. Set the switch under by vector to local 1-axis.
5. Set size = 1.000.
6. Set the color to blue.
7. Click project.
8. Click the card button from the permanent menu.
9. Set the entity selector to elems.
10. Select any element in the red component.
11. Click edit.
12. Review the card.
Note: The THETA field for the NASTRAN element card is now set to an angle for each element
in the collector. (This is the angle from the global coordinate system x-axis in the model.)

Figure 1
Note: This function assigns a material angle to the selected elements, which is defined as the
angle between the node1-node2 direction and the projection of the selected local axis
onto the surface of the shell element. How each analysis code interprets this information
varies. For visualization purposes, HyperMesh projects the selected axis onto the face of
the shell elements. Any changes you subsequently make to the specified system have no
effect on the elements.

Assigning an orientation vector to the elements by using a
vector
2. Select the elems, by collector.
3. Select collector color and click select.
4. Set the Element orientation method: to by vector.
5. Set the switch to vector.
6. Select the radial r vector from the spherical coordinate system in the center of the ball.
7. Select the temp node at the center of the ball as the base.
8. Set size = 1.000.
9. Set the color to blue.
10. Click review.
11. Click the card button from the permanent menu.
12. Set the entity selector to elems by double clicking on an element in the model.
13. Select any element in the green component.
14. Click edit.
Note: This function assigns a material angle, which is defined as the angle between the node1-
node2 direction and the projection of the selected vector, onto the surface of the shell
element, to the selected elements. How each analysis code interprets this information
varies. For visualization purposes, HyperMesh projects the selected vector onto the face
of the shell elements.
Assigning an orientation vector to the elements by using

an angle
2. Select the elems, by collector, in the yellow component.
3. Select the yellow collector and click select.
4. Set the Element orientation method: to by angle.
5. Enter angle = 45.00.
6. Click set.
7. Click the card button from the permanent blue menu.
8. Set the entity selector to elems by double clicking on an element in the model.
9. Select any element in the yellow component.
10. Click edit.

Note: THETA is set to 45.000. This function assigns the specified material angle, which is
defined as an angle from the node1-node2 along the surface of the shell element, to the
selected elements. How each analysis code interprets this information varies. For
visualization purposes, HyperMesh rotates the node1-node2 edge of the element around
the element normal through the defined angle.
Note: This option should be used only in situations where great care has been taken to assure
that the node1-node2 direction of the shell elements are initially aligned properly.
Reviewing Ply Directions

1. Select the ply directions subpanel from the composites panel.
2. Indicate the elements that you want to review.
3. Pick the elements on your model or Click elems and use the extended entity selection window.
4. Click color and select the display color of the review vectors or lines.
5. Click ply = field and enter the ply layer number that you wish to review.
6. Click review.
Note: Any elements that do not have a ply angle assigned, display the 0-degree direction as the
ply angle. Ply directions are set through card images in solver templates.

HyperMesh 4.0tutorials

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

HyperMesh 4.0tutorials

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Altair

Altair HyperMesh Tutorials

Web site www.altair.com

FTP site Address: ftp.altair.com or ftp2.altair.com

Password: <your e-mail address>

Location Telephone e-mail

North America 248.614.2400 hwsupport@altair.com

Germany +49 (0)7031.6208.22 support@altair.de

India +91.80.852.0327 support@altair-eng.soft.net

Italy +39.011.9007.711 support@altairtorino.it

Japan +81.3.5396.1341 aj-support@altairjp.co.jp

Scandinavia +46 (0)46.286.2050 support@altair.se

United Kingdom +44 (0)1327.810.700 supportuk@uk.altair.com

© 2000 Altair Engineering, Inc. All rights reserved.

The following tutorials are included:

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials 3

4 HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering

Creating and Editing Dictionaries and Editing Cards

Creating and Editing Dictionaries and Editing Cards

To retrieve the database file:

1. Select the files panel.

1. Select the template subpanel.

To update the element types to the NASTRAN format:

1. Select the 1D page.

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials 5

1. Select the BCs page.

To create a material collector:

1. Select the collectors panel.

To create an element collector:

1. Click the switch after collector type and select comps.

6 HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering

1. Select the update subpanel.

To change the name of existing collectors:

1. Select the rename panel.

To move existing elements into a different collector:

1. Select the organize panel.

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials 7

1. Click card in the permanent menu.

8 HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering

• The HyperMesh Environment

The HyperMesh Environment

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials 9

• Retrieving a HyperMesh Database

10 HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering

The Main Menu

To display the common panels between all menu pages:

1. Click Geom through Post.

3. Click 1-D, 2-D, 3-D.

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials 11

• geom cleanup (Geom)

Page Name Description New Panels

Geom Geometry creation and editing functions geom cleanup

1-D 1-D elements creation and editing functions line mesh

2-D 2-D elements creation and editing functions elem offset

3-D 3-D elements creation and editing functions elem offset

BCs Loads and boundary creation, output equations

Post Post-Processing functions

12 HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering

• A new option, offset ids.

• Supports direct CAD import.

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials 13

• options for IGES import is renamed.